RALI FX03 - 20june2023

RALI : FX 3
DATE OF EFFECT : 20/06/2023
Radiocommunications Assignment and Licensing Instruction
MICROWAVE FIXED SERVICES
FREQUENCY COORDINATION
AUSTRALIAN COMMUNICATIONS AND MEDIA AUTHORITY

SPECTRUM PLANNING & ENGINEERING BRANCH,
SPECTRUM ENGINEERING SECTION
CANBERRA
June 2023
RADIOCOMMUNICATIONS ASSIGNMENT AND LICENSING
INSTRUCTIONS
DISCLAIMER
The Australian Communications and Media Authority (ACMA) advises that these
instructions reflect the current policies of ACMA.
Prospective applicants for licenses should take whatever steps necessary to ensure that they
have access to appropriate technical or other specialist advice independent of ACMA
concerning their applications, the operation of radiocommunications equipment and
services, or any other matters relevant to the operation of transmitters and services under
the licenses in question.
The policies of ACMA, and the laws of the Commonwealth, may change from time to
time, and prospective licensees should ensure that they have informed themselves of the
current policies of ACMA and any relevant legislation (including subordinate instruments).
Furthermore, prospective applicants for licenses should not rely on statements made in
these instructions about policies that may be followed by other government authorities or
entities, nor about the effect of legislation. These instructions are not a substitute for
independent advice (legal or otherwise) tailored to the circumstances of individual
applicants.
Radiocommunications Assignment and Licensing Instructions are subject to periodic
review and are amended as necessary. To keep abreast of developments, it is important
that users ensure that they are in possession of the latest edition.
No liability is or will be accepted by the Minister for Broadband, Communications and the
Digital Economy, ACMA, the Commonwealth of Australia, or its officers, servants or
agents for any loss suffered, whether arising directly or indirectly, due to reliance on the
accuracy or contents of these instructions.
Suggestions for improvements to Radiocommunications Assignment and Licensing

Instructions may be addressed to the Manager, Spectrum Engineering, Spectrum Planning
Branch, Australian Communications and Media Authority, P.O. Box 78, BELCONNEN ACT
2616.
iii
Amendment Authorisation
The following amendments to RALI FX3 are authorised:
Date of Effect Page Date* Description of Amendment

20 June 2023 June 2023 Main Body:
New footnote added to 3.3.3 Site Sense, excluding compatibility
requirements in the 3.8 GHz band if co-sited parties can reach
an agreement.
Deleted clause 3.4.2 (Obsolete, 3.4 GHz PTP channel
arrangements have not been available since 2000).
Preamble: Updated 3.4 GHz spectrum licence band frequencies
and removed the 3425-3492.5 MHz band. Included new
footnote referencing site sense changes in the 3.8 channel
arrangement.
Appendix 1: Changes to 3.8 GHz channel arrangement and
added coordination with area-wide licences restriction.
28 October 2022 October 2022 Updated channel arrangements for the 7.2 GHz Band
23 September 2019 September 2019 Inclusion of new channel arrangements of 56 and 112 MHz in
the 38 GHz band (37.0-39.5 GHz).
Retiring the 7 MHz and 14 MHz channels from 38 GHz band.
Retiring the whole 28 GHz band (27.5-29.5 GHz) from fixed
service.
23 June 2016 June 2016 Inclusion of 10 MHz channels to the 1800 MHz band
24 October 2014 October 2014 Changes as a results of IFC 31/2014 to Appendix 1 channel
plans-1.8 GHz, 2.1 GHz, 2.2 GHz, 2.5 GHz (change to spectrum
licensing), 6 GHz, 6.7 GHz, 8 GHz, 10 GHz, 11 GHz, 13 GHz,
15 GHz, 22 GHz, new 28 GHz and consequential updates to
Appendix 3
18 January 2008 January 2008 The following changers were made to remove references to the
58 GHz Band as this band has been included in FX20
“Millimetre Wave Point to Point (Self-coordinated) Stations”.
Main Text – Deleted references to 58 GHz Band.
– Deleted reference to MDS.
Appendix 1 – Deleted references to 58GHz Band in preamble
and deleted 58 GHz Band RF Channel Arrangements.
Appendix 10 – Deleted 58 GHz Band Notional Antenna
Appendix 11 – Deleted 58 GHz Band Antenna Compliance
requirements.
11 August 2006 August 2006 Front pages: amended to reflect current organisational names
etc.
Main Body: amended to reflect current organisational names,

minor editorial changes.
Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

Instructions amended as follows :
Preamble: updated embargo references, reinstated 2.2 GHz

band, minor editorial changes.
1.8 GHz band: added reference "Strategies for WAS" paper,

added requirement for Advisory Note BL in candidate WAS
bands, added reference embargo 38 and consequential changes,
amended reference embargo 26 and consequential changes,
added reference MS 31 and consequential changes, minor
editorial changes.
RALI FX 3 Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination June 2023

iv

bands, added reference embargo 26 and consequential changes,
added reference embargo 38 and consequential changes, added
reference to FX 19 and consequential changes, added reference
2.1 GHz Band Plan and consequential changes, added reference
MS 31 and consequential changes, minor editorial changes.
2.2 GHz band: reverted to April 2004 version, added reference

"Strategies for WAS" paper, added requirement for Advisory
Note BL in candidate WAS band, added need to coordinate with
2.1 GHz services, added references embargoes 23/26 and
consequential changes, added reference to MSS band plan,
added reference MS 31 and consequential changes, minor
editorial changes.

band, added reference embargo 43 and consequential changes,
minor editorial changes.

band, added reference embargo 42 and consequential changes,
added need to coordinate 4 GHz fixed services / FSS /
radiolocation, amended ITU-R recommendation to latest
revision, minor editorial changes.
5 GHz band: added reference "Strategies for WAS" paper,

band, amended ITU-R recommendation to latest revision, minor
editorial changes.
6 September 2005 September 2005 Appendix 1 – RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
Instructions updated as follows:
Revision of assignment instructions in 2.1 GHz band and

removal of assignment instructions in 2.2 GHz band due to
Embargo 23.
Removal of MDS A band plan and references to MDS A within

2.1 and 2.2 GHz bands.
8 April 2005 April 2005 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
Summary table amended to remove MDS A band and to reflect

changed frequency range of 2.5 GHz ENG band.
1.5 GHz and 1.5 GHz DRCS bands - updated notes concerning
point-to-multipoint systems in defined rural and remote areas.
Requirement to apply Advisory Note BL to all assignments in
the 1452-1492 and 1518-1535 MHz frequency ranges
2.5 GHz ENG band –pre- 7 March 2005 channel arrangements
removed.
8.3 GHz band – modified to reflect inclusion of channel 2
within ABC TOBN licence.
13 GHz band – clarified application of no interference, no
protection condition on TOB assignments
18 GHz band - Removal of Notes allowing assignments under

v
the previous channel arrangements that were superseded in

1996. Note relating to Embargo 25 has been revised and Note
about Advisory Note BL has been revised. Minimum path
length requirements have been revised.
7 April 2004 April 2004 The following changes were required as a result of the
introduction of the antenna compliance regime based on front-
to-back ratio and cross-polar discrimination:
Main text Sections 3.1.4, 3.2.4 and 4.2.2 were updated.
Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

Introductory text updated to reflect change from notional

antenna regime to antenna requirements under Appendix 11.
Notional antenna pattern envelopes removed from all band

modules, as necessary, and placed in Appendix 10 Annex A.
Appendix 6 updated to remove case studies referring to notional

antennas.
Appendix 10 (including Annex A) added detailing notional

antennas regime and consolidating radiation pattern envelopes.
Appendix 11 added detailing antenna compliance requirements.
Consequential update to Table of Contents (Appendices) to

reflect addition of Appendix 10 and 11.
Also a number of minor changes and editorials were made

throughout the document.
16 September 2003 September 2003 Appendix 1 – RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
Group A MDS band updated to reflect revised dates in “2.1
GHz Band Frequency Band Plan 2002”;
2.1 GHz Band updated to reflect revised dates in “2.1 GHz
Band Frequency Band Plan 2002”;
2.2 GHz Band updated to reflect revised dates in “2.1 GHz
Band Frequency Band Plan 2002” and some simplifications
due to removal of text that described transitional arrangements
that are now in place.
Other parts have also been updated as follows:
Summary table of Microwave Fixed Service Bands – Typical
Utilisation Parameters.
17 December 2002 December 2002 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
Changes to the 1.8 GHz Band to introduce coordination
requirements with 2 GHz spectrum licences, remove reference
to coordination with private CTS, add reference to coordination
with FWA services and remove Advisory Notes F4, BL and
BN.
23 August 2002 August 2002 Section 3.2.2 - text added to reflect output power restrictions to
FS operating in the band 18.6-18.8 GHz as specified in Article
21.5A

vi
Appendix 1 – RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

18 GHz band - updated to include note on power restriction
above.
2.5 GHz ENG band – revised start date for new channelling
arrangements and inclusion of a note concerning no protection
from spread spectrum devices in the band 2463-2483.5 MHz.
……… 3 June 2002 Appendix 1 – RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
June 2002 Group B MDS band deleted (now spectrum licensed – no
apparatus licensing in this band);
Group A MDS band updated to reflect introduction of “2.1
June 2002
GHz Band Frequency Band Plan 2002”;
2.1 GHz Band updated to reflect the introduction of the “2.1
June 2002 GHz Band Frequency Band Plan 2002” and the “Mobile-
Satellite Service (2 GHz) Frequency Band Plan 2002”;
June 2002 2.2 GHz Band updated to reflect the introduction of the “2.1
GHz Band Frequency Band Plan 2002”.
Other parts have also been updated as follows:
June 2002 Summary table of Microwave Fixed Service Bands – Typical
Utilisation Parameters.
118 15 January 2002 Appendix 1 – RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
January 2002 Change to the 38 GHz Band notional antenna radiation pattern
envelope (RPE). The RPE was altered between 0 to 5.5
degrees.
118 13 December 2001 Appendix 1 – RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

December 2001 Change ABC designated channels (channels 4, 7, 15 and 18) to

S (shared) channels and change arrangements for access
between 7250 and 7375 MHz by non-Defence licensees.
118 19 October 2001 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
October 2001 Remove reference to Manager, Radiocommunications Licensing

Policy Team on the first page.
October 2001 Add 2.2 GHz entry to table "Microwave Fixed Service Bands -
Typical Utilisation Parameters".
October 2001 Remove Advisory Notes F4, BL and BN in the 2.1 GHz Band.
October 2001 Remove Advisory Notes BN and BL and reference to Embargo

23 in the 2.2 GHz Band.
July 2001 Correct page date error for RPE [Page Date August 1998] and
reinstate correct version of protection ratio correction factors
graph [Page Date October 1999] in 7.5 GHz Band.
Correct page date error on page 2 [Page Date June 2001],
June 2001 correct page date error for RPE and protection ratio tables [Page
Date August 1998] and reinstate correct version of protection
ratio correction factors graph [Page Date October 1999] in the

vii
13 GHz Band.
Other parts have been updated as follows:

October 2001 Consequential update to Table of Contents (Appendices) to
reflect Appendix 7 title change.
October 2001 Consequential update to Part 4.2.5 to reflect Appendix 7 title
change.
October 2001 Additions to References due to 2.1 and 2.2 GHz Band
references.
October 2001 Correction to unwanted signal power formula in Part 4.2.3.
October 2001 Change "Amendment History" to "Amendment Authorisation".
28 September 2001 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

Changes to the 2.1 GHz Band to accommodate the new 2.2 GHz
September 2001
Band, introduce coordination requirements with 2 GHz and 2.3
GHz spectrum licences, update coordination requirements with
MDS A services, introduce coordination requirements with
Defence aeronautical mobile telemetry systems, update
protection ratio tables, and update channel availability.
September 2001 Add the 2.2 GHz Band.
Appendix 7 updated to incorporate advice for coordination of
September 2001
fixed services in the 2.1 and 2.2 GHz Bands with 2 GHz
spectrum licences.
21 August 2001 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
June 2001 Change to the 2.5 GHz Band method of channel designation
from centre frequency and channel width to lower and upper
frequency bounds.
frequency bounds.
frequency bounds.
June 2001 Change to the 13 GHz Band method of channel designation

frequency bounds for TOB.
July 2001 7.5 GHz Band updated to accommodate higher demand for
wider bandwidth channels - channel raster and protection ratio
tables.
June 2001 Annex A updated to accommodate ITU-R Recommendation

P.837-3.
June 2001 Table "Microwave fixed services bands - typical utilisation

parameters" updated.
Table "Index of RF Channel Arrangements" deleted.

22 January 2001 Appendix 1- RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

viii
January 2001 Table "Microwave fixed services bands - typical utilisation

parameters" updated to reflect spectrum licensing in the 3.4
GHz Band and the Group B MDS Band.
January 2001 Channel arrangements for the 3.4 GHz Band updated.
29 May 2000 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
May 2000 Corrections to Notes text and addition of Advisory Notes in 1.8
GHz Band.
May 2000 Correction to Reference 8 title and addition of Advisory Notes

in 2.1 GHz Band.
May 2000 Addition of text to reflect new band plan and Embargo 23 in the
Group A MDS Band.
May 2000 Addition of text to reflect spectrum licensing and Embargo 26

in the Group B MDS Band.
20 April 2000 March 2000 Appendix 3 updated to include interim guidelines for digital
fixed services, based on ETSI and FCC emission criteria.
14 February 2000 February 2000 Part 4 - 'Frequency Coordination' page 29 amendment of the net
effective antenna gain equation and page 31 amendment of the
summation of individual interference entries equation.
January 2000 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
January 2000 The 1.8 GHz Band amended to take account of additional
spectrum allocated for spectrum licensing.
January 2000 The 7.2 GHz Band amended to include a reference to Embargo
30.
January 2000 Appendix 7 amended to take account of additional spectrum

allocated for spectrum licensing.
29 October 1999 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment
October 1999 Protection ratio correction factor curves updated for the 1.5, 1.5
DRCS, 1.8, 2.1, 3.8, 6, 6.7, 7.5, 8, 10, 11, 13, 15, 18, 22, 38 and
50 GHz Bands.
October 1999 Antenna RPEs for the 18 and 38 GHz Band redefined.
October 1999 Appendix 6 references to MS 28 replaced by reference to the

information paper "Principles for Decision Making".
October 1999 Part 1 references to MS 28 replaced by reference to the

information paper "Principles for Decision Making".
October 1999 References updated to include the information paper "Principles

for Decision Making".
October 1999 Correction to text in section 2.1 of Appendix 5 (117.5E

changed to 171.5E).
October 1999 Appendix 9 'Adaptive Transmit Power Control' and Annex A to

Appendix 9 'ATPC Example Calculations' added.

ix
October 1999 Consequential amendments to the Table of Contents, sections

3.2.2 and 4.2.2 due to the introduction of Adaptive Transmit
Power Control.
31 May 1999 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

May 1999 The 1.8 GHz Band and the 2.1 GHz Band updated regarding
tenure of new and renewed fixed service licences in the bands.
May 1999 The 58 GHz Band added.
May 1999 Consequential amendments to the References list.
12 January 1999 December 1998 Appendix 8 'Coordination of DRCS Outstations with Point-to-
Point Links' and Annex A to Appendix 8 '1.5 GHz DRCS
Outstation Characteristics' added.
December 1998 Consequential amendments to Part 3.4.1.
December 1998 RALI AC1 removed from Reference list.
December 1998 Minor amendment to text in Part 3.1.7, clarifying analogue

versus digital protection criteria.
13 October 1998 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

October 1998 New assignment note added to the 3.4, 3.8 and 11 GHz Bands.
October 1998 New interleaved channel pattern added to the 11 GHz Band.
October 1998 New protection ratio correction factor graphs added to the 3.8,
6.7 and 11 GHz Bands.
October 1998 3.4 GHz Band updated reference to FX 14.
October 1998 Part 3.4.3 updated reference to FX 14.
October 1998 Reference list added reference to FX 14.
October 1998 Appendix 4 amended.
October 1998 Annex A to Appendix 6 amended.
* The Page Date appears at the bottom of each page and indicates the date that the page was
last updated.

x
AMENDMENT AUTHORISATION:
Approved 16/06/2023
Chris Worley
Manager
Spectrum Engineering
Spectrum Planning & Engineering Branch
Australian Communications & Media Authority
File: ACMA2005/350

xi
Update History - pre August 1998
SECTION DATE COMMENTS

RALI 16/12/97 Sequence Number 125 (96) (12), RALI pages preceding
Section 1 were updated.
23/01/97 Sequence Number 96 (12), RALI updated.
02/10/92 Sequence Number 12, New RALI.
1 RF Channel Arrangements 10/02/98 Attachment added relating to 1.8 GHz coordination with
(previously Channel spectrum licences. The Introduction and 1.8 GHz RF
Arrangements) Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions have
also been updated to reference the new attachment.
12/12/97 18 GHz Band - Notes 3 and 4 were added to the
Assignment Instructions.
24/09/97 2.1 GHz Band updated.
15/09/97 1.8 GHz Band updated.
04/08/97 18 GHz Band updated.
22 GHz Band updated.
January 1997 8.3 GHz Band updated.
November Complete update of Section 1.
1996
14/11/1996 New RF channel arrangements for the 18 GHz Band.
09/10/1995 New RF channel arrangements for the 31 GHz Band.
12/09/1995 New Section 1.
28/07/1995 New channel arrangement for the 8.3 GHz band.
10/10/1994 New interim channel arrangement for the 49 GHz band.
05/08/1994 New channel arrangement for the 5 GHz band.
03/05/1993 New attachment to the 13 GHz band channel arrangement.
08/10/1992 New channel arrangement for the 15 GHz band.
2 Standard Method of
Frequency Coordination
3 Rules for System Planning 05/08/1994 New notional antenna pattern for the 5 GHz band.
and Frequency
Coordination
30/11/1992 New notional antenna pattern for the 7.5 GHz band.
4 Interference Criteria 30/11/1992 New 15 GHz protection ratios.
08/10/1982 New 15 GHz protection ratios.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 PURPOSE ..................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 SCOPE ......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 OUTLINE ..................................................................................................................................... 2
2. BACKGROUND ........................................................................................................................... 3
2.1 MICROWAVE FIXED SERVICE ...................................................................................................... 3
2.1.1 Applications ........................................................................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Spectrum Suitability............................................................................................................... 3
2.1.3 Allocations, Band Planning and Channel Arrangements ...................................................... 4
2.1.4 Equipment Standards............................................................................................................. 5
2.1.5 Licensing ............................................................................................................................... 5
3. COORDINATION AND SYSTEM PLANNING RULES ......................................................... 6
3.1 ASSIGNMENT INSTRUCTIONS....................................................................................................... 6
3.1.1 Typical Use ............................................................................................................................ 6
3.1.2 Assignment Priority ............................................................................................................... 7
3.1.3 Minimum Path Length ........................................................................................................... 7
3.1.4 Antenna Requirements ........................................................................................................... 7
3.1.5 Notes and Special Assignment Instructions ........................................................................... 8
3.1.6 References ............................................................................................................................. 8
3.1.7 Protection Ratios and Interference Criteria .......................................................................... 8
3.1.8 Protection Ratio (path length) correction factors ................................................................. 9
3.2 RADIO EQUIPMENT CONSIDERATIONS .......................................................................................... 9
3.2.1 Spectrum Efficiency ............................................................................................................. 10
3.2.2 Transmit Power and Adaptive Transmit Power Control (ATPC) ........................................ 10
3.2.3 Emission Criteria ................................................................................................................ 10
3.2.4 Antennas .............................................................................................................................. 11
3.3 RADIOCOMMUNICATION SITE AND SYSTEM PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS ................................ 12
3.3.1 Geographic Coordinates ..................................................................................................... 12
3.3.2 High Spectrum Demand Areas (HSDA) .............................................................................. 12
3.3.3 Compatibility (Site Sense) ................................................................................................... 14
3.3.4 Link Diversity Options ......................................................................................................... 16
3.3.5 Passive and “RF” repeaters ................................................................................................ 16
3.4 POINT-MULTIPOINT FIXED SERVICES........................................................................................ 19
3.4.1 Rural telephony (1.5 GHz DRCS) systems .......................................................................... 19
3.4.2 3.4 GHz Fixed Point-to-Multipoint services ........................... Error! Bookmark not defined.
4. FREQUENCY COORDINATION ............................................................................................ 21
4.1 AN OVERVIEW OF THE COORDINATION PROCESS ....................................................................... 21
4.2 BASIC METHOD OF FREQUENCY COORDINATION FOR TERRESTRIAL FIXED SERVICES ................. 22
4.2.1 Identifying potentially affected services .............................................................................. 24
4.2.2 Calculating received signal levels ....................................................................................... 26
4.2.3 Assessing received signal levels against interference management criteria ....................... 29
4.2.4 Compliance with assignment instructions and planning rules ............................................ 30
4.2.5 Coordination with other types of radiocommunication services ......................................... 30
4.3 CONSIDERATIONS WHICH MAY FACILITATE SUCCESSFUL COORDINATION ................................. 32
4.3.1 Detailed Interference Analyses ............................................................................................ 32
4.3.2 Interference Countermeasures ............................................................................................ 33
FX 3 “Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination” June 2023

RALI AUTHORISATION
GLOSSARY
REFERENCES
Appendices:
1. RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions

Annex A - Propagation Related Statistical Information
2. Interference Mechanisms and Performance Criteria
3. Fixed Service Emission Criteria
4. Fixed Service Propagation Modelling

Propagation models applicable to the fixed service
Equations for calculating fixed link path losses
5. Geostationary Satellite Orbit Avoidance

Annex A - Microwave Fixed Service Bands Sharing with GSO Space
Services
6. Application of Assignment Policy Rules

Annex A - Examples in support of Appendix 6
7. Coordination of Apparatus Licences with Spectrum Licences:

1.8, 2.1 and 2.2 GHz Band Fixed Services
8. Coordination of DRCS Outstations with Point-to-Point Links

Annex A - 1.5 GHz DRCS Outstation Characteristics
9. Adaptive Transmit Power Control

Annex A - ATPC Example Calculations
10. Notional Antennas

Annex A –Notional Antenna Radiation Pattern Envelopes (NARPE)
11. Antenna Compliance Requirements
FX 3 “Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination” June 2023

1
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of this Radiocommunications Assignment and Licensing Instruction
(RALI) FX 3 “Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination” document is to
describe procedures for the frequency coordination of terrestrial microwave fixed
services and to specify key technical radiocommunication policy requirements
applicable to these services within the general spectrum management context.
The document is primarily intended for use by Australian Communications and Media
Authority (ACMA) and Accredited1 frequency assigners engaged in the assignment of
frequencies for microwave fixed services. As the RALI document specifies important
planning rules, recommendations and useful information for the coordination and
licensing of microwave fixed services, it will also be of particular interest to
telecommunication network operators, system planners and equipment
manufacturers/importers.
This RALI replaces RALI FX 3, sequence number 125, dated 16 December 1997.
The information in this document reflects the Australian Communications and Media
Authority’s statement of current policy in relation to the frequency coordination of
microwave fixed services. Users of RALI FX 3 are advised that, recognising that the
ITU-R continues to study and make recommendations regarding radiocommunications
and associated regulatory and spectrum management issues, this document is subject to
ongoing revision. In the application of the policy, ACMA and accredited assigners are
required to take all relevant matters into account and to decide each case on its merits2.
Any consistent anomalies or cases where relevant issues are considered inadequately
addressed within the scope of the RALI, should be brought to the attention of the
Manager, Spectrum Engineering Section, Spectrum Planning Branch, Australian
Communications and Media Authority, PO Box 78 BELCONNEN ACT 2616.
1.2 SCOPE
Microwave fixed services include point-to-point and point-to-multipoint radio
systems utilised for the transmission of voice, video and data information. The
definition and nature of microwave fixed service systems is further described under
Part 2 “Background”. The scope of the RALI is generally limited to the coordination
of homogeneous line-of-sight fixed services operating in specified frequency bands
(Refer to Appendix 1), although some of the criteria and methodology may also be
useful for the coordination of other types of fixed services.
In general, the coordination of microwave fixed services with other types of

radiocommunication services (including Multipoint Distribution Systems (MDS),
1
Refer to RALI AC 1 “Requirements for Accredited Frequency Assigners - Assigning Fixed
Point-to-Point Microwave Services”.
2
In accordance with ACA Information Paper “Principles for Decision Making”.
FX 3 Part 1 - Introduction June 2023

2
special types of fixed service systems and inter-service coordination3) is detailed in

other documents, as identified in the References section of the RALI. However,
specific guidance is provided to facilitate the protection of geostationary space services
operating within bands shared with fixed terrestrial services, as required under the
International Telecommunication Union (ITU) Radio Regulations. Detailed guidance
is also provided with respect to the coordination of apparatus licensed fixed services
with spectrum licensed radiocommunication services operating within particular
frequency bands.
Although the RALI specifies a number of important rules and guidelines which need to
be taken into account as part of the system planning process, it is not intended to serve
as a link planning document as such. The scope of the specified planning rules and
coordination guidelines is limited to the matters considered necessary for the efficient
utilisation of the radiofrequency spectrum, management of interference and
compliance with relevant domestic and international radiocommunications regulatory
requirements. For general link planning purposes, reference should be made to other
relevant publications, such as the “ITU-R Handbook on Digital Radio-Relay Systems”,
Geneva 1996 which provides detailed guidance on most aspects of fixed service link
planning.
1.3 OUTLINE
The document comprises four main parts:
• Part 1 - (this part) the introduction, detailing the purpose and scope of the RALI;
• Part 2 - provides background information and a brief overview of the general
regulatory and technical planning environment for microwave fixed services;
• Part 3 - details specific coordination and system planning rules, necessary for the
optimisation of spectrum usage and the management of interference; and
• Part 4 - outlines a basic method of frequency coordination for terrestrial microwave
fixed services.
Appendix 1 “RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions” details criteria

specific to each of the fixed link frequency bands currently supported in Australia.
Further appendices and annexes provide additional supporting material, including
some of the more detailed frequency coordination methodologies, interference
protection and emission criteria.
The arrangements detailed in this document are based on relevant ITU-R work,
studies conducted by the ACMA (and its predecessors) and accepted Australian
industry practices. References to the appropriate ITU-R recommendations, RALIs and
other documents are incorporated throughout the document and are consolidated in the
Reference section of the document.
3
eg. Cordless Telecommunication Services (CTS), satellite services and Spectrum Licensed services.
FX 3 Part 1 - Introduction June 2023

3
2. BACKGROUND
This part of the RALI FX 3 provides background information and a brief overview of
the general regulatory and technical planning environment for microwave fixed
services.
2.1 MICROWAVE FIXED SERVICE

In accordance with the “Australian Radiofrequency Spectrum Plan” (the Spectrum
Plan) a “fixed service” is defined simply as “a radiocommunication service between
particular fixed points4”. Thus the basic definition potentially encompasses a very
broad range of point-to-point and point-to-multipoint radiocommunication services.
The terms “microwave fixed service” and “fixed links”, although not formal, are
adopted in this document in order to distinguish the types of wideband systems
operating in the “microwave” frequency range (about 1 to 60 GHz) from the generic
service definition. Other terms, such as “radio-relay systems” are also commonly
utilised to denote particular sub-types of microwave fixed services, as outlined in the
next sub-part.
2.1.1 Applications
Currently supported microwave fixed service applications may be classified into a
number of sub-types, usually defined by their operational application and typically
falling into the following main categories:
• trunk radio-relay systems - supporting high speed common carrier networks;

• local network access links - usually small to medium capacity, typically used for
serving regional, rural and remote areas;
• thin route networks - typically small to medium capacity and often used by public
and private utility operators and mobile telecommunication operators;
• customer links - typically small capacity providing mainly in-house voice and data
communications, usually over relatively short distances; and
• studio-to-transmitter and outside broadcast links - as typically used by the network
broadcasters.
An ever increasing proportion of the above described fixed services support digital
communication requirements, with data rates from a few hundred kilobits per second
for some local access and telemetry systems and customer links to a current maximum
of 155 Mbit/s in support of broadband applications. Analogue microwave fixed
services are generally limited to the outside broadcast and limited numbers of older
television distribution applications but even in those applications moves are being
made toward digital operation.
2.1.2 Spectrum Suitability

Given the basic transmission capacity requirements of modern communication
networks and the nature of the radiofrequency spectrum, wideband (512 kbit/s) fixed
4
This definition is also consistent with that given in the ITU Radio Regulations.
FX 3 Part 2 - Background June 2023

4
service links are generally operated in the microwave region of the spectrum between
about 1 to 60 GHz. The spectrum below about 1 GHz is rarely used for such links
because of the bandwidth demand imposed by the transmission requirement and in
any case this spectrum is already devoted to use by various other radiocommunication
services, in particular the broadcasting and mobile services. The upper bound for
fixed links is currently considered to be about 60 GHz, due to inherent propagation
limitations and cost factors associated with millimetrewave radio technology.
The lower microwave bands, between about 1 to 10 GHz, have traditionally been
preferred for long haul radio-relay applications due to their favourable propagation
characteristics. Consequently, these bands are well utilised and congested at many
locations, including the major telecommunication trunk routes and the larger
metropolitan population centres. These lower microwave bands also accommodate
the bulk of the population of the older analogue links still in service. Additionally, the
1-3 GHz bands are subject to increasing pressure to accommodate new terrestrial and
satellite based mobile telecommunication and broadcasting services.
The bands above about 10 GHz are subject to increasing attenuation and link
availability constraints due to rain intensity related outage events. In practice, this
equates to decreasing achievable hop lengths. However, these bands offer capacity to
support short hop high density applications such as mobile network backbones,
customer megalinks and other urban network applications. Re-use distances are
significantly smaller and available antenna isolation greater in these higher bands,
thus optimising their utility in the high-density urban environment.
2.1.3 Allocations, Band Planning and Channel Arrangements

Australian fixed service frequency allocations are specified in the Spectrum Plan and
generally conform to the ITU Radio Regulations fixed service allocations for
Region 3.
As outlined in the Spectrum Plan, all of the fixed service allocations between 1 GHz
and 60 GHz are also allocated to one or more other services. Not all fixed allocation
arrangement options are able to be implemented in all countries, nor would this be
sensible. National policies generally determine the use to which each band is put;
some bands are reserved for the exclusive use of one service allocation whilst others
may be available on a shared basis to one or more of the allocated services. The
specific utilisation of each band is subject to particular implementation arrangements,
including relevant intra-service and inter-service sharing and coordination
considerations, normally derived from ITU agreed criteria. Fixed service microwave
bands are generally planned to align with well defined ITU recommendations or other
recognised regional standards and to accommodate readily available products.
Accordingly, most of the Australian Radio Frequency (RF) Channel Arrangements (as
detailed in Appendix 1) are closely aligned with the appropriate ITU-R
recommendations.
Internationally, fixed service recommendations are developed by ITU-R Study

Group 9, which is tasked with the study of the technical and operational aspects of
fixed services. Australian participation in the work of Study Group 9 is coordinated
by the ACMA, on advice from the Australian Radiocommunication Study Group 9
(ARSG9). ARSG9 meets regularly to consider international fixed service
developments and proposals and contribute to the work of the ITU

5
Radiocommunication Sector. Membership is open to all parties interested in the fixed

services; members include private and public sector organisations (eg. the
telecommunication carriers, the ACMA and other major fixed link users including
defence and broadcasters, equipment manufacturers and other industry bodies).
2.1.4 Equipment Standards

No definitive Australian radiocommunication standards or regulatory type approval
procedures are in place, or seen as necessary, for microwave fixed service
radiocommunication equipment. However, it is expected that such equipment:
• comply with the arrangements detailed in this document (with particular reference
to Part 3.2 “Radio Equipment Considerations”);
• are operated in compliance with the technical conditions specified in the relevant
ACMA licence; and
• be manufactured to conform with the requirements of the International Radio
Regulations, relevant ITU Recommendations and/or other recognised world-wide
or regional standards.
2.1.5 Licensing
Microwave fixed services are normally licensed, under Part 3.3 of the
Radiocommunications Act 1992, as Apparatus Licences of the Fixed Licence type5.
Fixed link licences are also subject to the requirements of the “Radiocommunications
Licence Conditions (Fixed) Licence Determination No.1 of 1997”.
A summary of the applicable Apparatus Licence fees is provided in the ACMA

document “Radiocommunications Apparatus Licence Fees and Charges”, which also
incorporates an overview of the Apparatus Licence Fee Framework and the available
licence types.
5
Where necessary, special Apparatus Licence arrangements may be invoked, such as in the case of the
Multipoint Distribution Stations and Television Outside Broadcast stations. However, in particular
cases other licensing categories may apply, eg. in some circumstances fixed link operation may be
covered under a relevant Class Licence or Spectrum Licence.

6
3. COORDINATION AND SYSTEM PLANNING RULES
This part of the RALI details assignment instructions, coordination and general
system planning rules considered necessary for the management of interference and
the optimisation of spectrum usage for microwave fixed services. The rules are
established as a reasonable balance between the cost of implementing services,
unnecessary spectrum denial and the likelihood of interference, with particular
relevance to identified (see Part 3.3.2) High Spectrum Demand Areas (HSDA).
In considering the application of assignment instructions and planning rules, assigners

are reminded of the need for consistency and transparency, with particular reference
to applications seeking exceptions to, or the relaxation of, specific assignment policy
requirements. Overall guidance regarding such considerations is provided in
Appendix 6 “Application of Assignment Policy Rules”.
3.1 ASSIGNMENT INSTRUCTIONS

Assignment instructions, as detailed in Appendix 1 for each microwave fixed service
band, define particular assignment criteria and address other considerations specific to
the utilisation of each band. Instructions and/or advice are normally included for
utilisation, (channel) assignment priority, minimum path length and minimum antenna
performance requirements, with the object of optimising spectrum utilisation.
Specific notes are also provided in the assignment instructions to cover any special
requirements (eg. a requirement to apply particular Special Conditions or Advisory
Notes) and references relevant to such considerations.
The following sub-parts provide general guidance regarding the purpose and scope of
particular assignment instructions.
3.1.1 Typical Use

This specification identifies the types of fixed link applications typically supported in
a given frequency band, in terms of technology (analogue/digital) and system
capacity.
The choice of an appropriate frequency band and channel raster is important and
should ideally match the proposed communication need in terms of achievable path
length and system performance objectives (ie. the highest possible frequency band
should be utilised), with the link occupied bandwidth optimised against the available
channelwidth. Nevertheless, provided that a proposal:
• meets the relevant coordination and licensing criteria;

• complies with the relevant regulatory provisions; and
• does not unreasonably impact on spectrum availability for other users
the prospective licensee is at liberty to choose the appropriate frequency band that
meets their operational requirement.
FX 3 Part 3 - Coordination and System Planning Rules June 2023

7
3.1.2 Assignment Priority

The assignment priority defines the order in which the available channels in a
particular channel raster should be assigned, with a view to optimising6 the loading of
radiofrequency channels in a given frequency band.
Where an initial choice of a channel in the assignment priority is precluded through

unsuccessful coordination, the next channel in the priority sequence is to be
attempted. In general, optimum spectrum utilisation is achieved by maximising the
re-use of channels in the order of the assignment priority sequence and is often
referred to as the vertical loading (of radiofrequency channels) principle. In practice
this means assigning the first channel in the specified priority which passes the
coordination criteria.
3.1.3 Minimum Path Length

The minimum path length defines the smallest end-to-end distance for a single-hop
link which may be supported in a particular frequency band.
At the lower end of the microwave spectrum, line-of-sight path lengths of the order of
60 -100 km are achievable, depending upon system gain and link performance
objectives. As mentioned in Part 2 of this RALI, the available path length decreases
with increasing frequency and propagation losses. For radio-relay systems a decrease
in available path length equates to additional infrastructure and system costs in the
form of additional repeaters. Accordingly, the lower microwave frequency bands
should be assigned primarily to systems requiring the use of long link paths, where
fade margins are often critical. For microwave fixed services with link paths shorter
than the specified minimum path length, higher frequency bands should to be utilised.
Note: The minimum path length requirement will not normally be relaxed within
designated HSDA locations.
3.1.4 Antenna Requirements

Antenna requirements specify the minimum allowed antenna performance for
antennas used in the fixed service bands.
As outlined in Part 4.2.2, wanted and unwanted signal levels are directly dependent
upon antenna performance. The antenna may be considered to be the single most
important component of a fixed service system in terms of frequency coordination and
in determining the overall extent of spectrum denial to other services. Generally,
antennas with higher levels of discrimination to off-axis signals facilitate more
opportunity for frequency re-use.
The antenna requirements detailed in Appendix 11 have been developed to provide

simple, unambiguous criteria against which antenna compliance can be easily
determined. This method removes elements of subjective judgement and facilitates a
transparent and light touch approach to antenna assessment.
The criteria outlined in Appendix 11 were developed following studies on antenna

manufacturer data, analysis of antenna usage within individual frequency bands and
6
Sometimes other reasons (eg. interservice considerations) may dictate a particular priority.

8
locations, and extensive statistical analysis of antenna performance correlations.

Appendix 11 sets performance requirements that may allow the use of smaller
antennas (as opposed to Appendix 10 criteria which tended to imply a minimum
aperture size), as long as the overall performance of the chosen antenna meets
specified front-to-back ratio and cross-polar discrimination requirements. This
approach ensures that a required level of frequency re-use (i.e. spectrum efficiency) is
maintained, while providing licensees with greater flexibility in terms of antenna
selection.
Table 1 in Appendix 11 generally allows for the use of standard, non shrouded
antennas in non-HSDA areas, and imposes a requirement for the use of high
performance, shrouded antennas in the HSDA. Certain frequency bands (3.8, 6.0, 6.7
& 8.0 GHz) are important trunk bands. Accordingly, the Appendix 11 Table 1 criteria
have been chosen to facilitate a high level of spectrum re-use in these bands.
Note: The antenna compliance arrangements described in Appendix 11 represent a change from the
previous practice of assessing candidate antennas against a defined “notional antenna RPE”. To allow
a transition period for the introduction of the Appendix 11 arrangements, over the period 31 March
2004 and 31 March 2005, antennas may be assessed against either the Appendix 11 arrangements or
the earlier arrangements (for convenience those notional antenna arrangements have been consolidated
in Appendix 10).
3.1.5 Notes and Special Assignment Instructions

The notes provided with the Assignment Instructions given in Appendix 1, specify
particular (band specific) criteria and provide important advice regarding any special
requirements. References may be made to legal instruments (e.g. the Spectrum Plan,
formal Band Plans) or other RALIs (e.g. to relevant spectrum embargo notices or
coordination guidelines).
The onus is on the frequency assigner to take account of and comply with the relevant
requirements specified in the reference documents.
3.1.6 References
Usually the source ITU-R recommendation (or other recognised standard) for the RF
Channel Arrangement adopted for the implementation of the particular band is given.
In addition, the full titles of any specific reference documents identified in the
Assignment Instructions are also detailed in Appendix 1.
Note: ITU recommendations for RF channel arrangements often specify different

(sometimes numerous) channelling options. Accordingly, although based on the
same source recommendations, there can be significant differences between the
Australian arrangements detailed in Appendix 1 and those adopted by other countries.
3.1.7 Protection Ratios and Interference Criteria

Protection ratios, as defined in Appendix 1 and applied under the basic method of
frequency coordination detailed in Part 4, specify the default interference criteria for
systems operating in each microwave fixed service frequency band7. The discrete
protection ratio criteria are to be used when more detailed information on system
protection requirements is not available. In essence:
7
Excepting certain bands/channel rasters designated for TOB or other itinerant use applications.

9
• co-channel and adjacent channel protection ratios are defined for digital and, for
the bands supporting significant populations of FM video and FDM telephony
links, analogue fixed service systems; however,
• in the bands for which analogue system protection ratios are not explicitly defined,
the protection ratios and correction factors specified for digital systems shall apply
irrespective of the modulation type employed. In effect, no additional protection
will be afforded to analogue systems operating within these bands.
Given that these protection ratios address the requirements of a broad range of fixed
service systems, situations may arise where an overly conservative coordination result
is obtained using these criteria. In these cases, a more detailed approach, taking
account of system specific interference criteria, may be appropriate. In general, a
coordination approach based on the direct application of threshold degradation and/or
noise interference criteria8 is potentially more efficient in terms of optimising channel
loading and overall spectrum productivity.
In cases where an RF channel arrangement is overlaid with a pre-existing arrangement

or other overlaid arrangements for which no specific protection ratios are defined:
• Where the potential interfering and victim spectra overlap, the relevant co-channel
criteria should be applied;
• In the case of non-overlapping but adjacent spectra, the relevant adjacent channel
criteria should be applied; or
• Where sufficient detailed information regarding the potentially interfering emission
and the victim service characteristics is available, the FDR9 criteria outlined in
Spectrum Planning Report SPP 4/95 “Frequency Dependent Rejection (FDR)
Software” may be used as the basis for a more detailed analysis.
3.1.8 Protection Ratio (path length) correction factors

The protection ratios specified for digital systems (in Appendix 1) for each fixed
service band are normalised for a particular path length and geoclimatic zone.
Accordingly, appropriate corrections must be applied to the tabulated protection ratio
values in order to account for the victim system actual path length and geographic
location. In the absence of more detailed statistical data for local worst month
multipath fading and/or rainfall intensity, the geoclimatic contour maps provided in
Annex A to Appendix 1 may be used.
3.2 RADIO EQUIPMENT CONSIDERATIONS

Although the ACA does not mandate regulatory type approval procedures for
microwave fixed service radiocommunication equipment, it is expected that such
equipment be manufactured to conform with the requirements of the International
Radio Regulations, relevant ITU recommendations and/or other credible recognised
world-wide or regional standards. More specifically, in order to meet the minimum
8
Interference mechanisms and performance criteria are the subject of ongoing ACA work, the results
of which will be included in Appendix 2.
9
Frequency Dependent Rejection, which takes into account the victim receiver selectivity response.

10
requirements for licensing, microwave fixed service equipment must comply with the
arrangements detailed in this document, including the following regulatory criteria for
spectral efficiency, transmit power limits, emission criteria and antennas.
3.2.1 Spectrum Efficiency

Microwave fixed service equipment supporting a digital baseband signal (i.e. digital
systems) intended for operation in Australia in the bands below 19.7 GHz are required to
comply with a minimum spectrum efficiency criteria of 1 bit per second per Hertz
(1 bit/s/Hz). No explicit spectral efficiency criterion applies to analogue FDM or FM
video systems.
3.2.2 Transmit Power and Adaptive Transmit Power Control (ATPC)

In accordance with International Radio Regulation 21.5(3) and ITU-R Recommendation
SF.406 “Maximum Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power of Radio-Relay System
Transmitters Operating in the Frequency Bands Shared with the Fixed-satellite Service”,
the power delivered by a transmitter measured at the antenna connection10 of a station in
the fixed service shall not exceed:
• +43 dBm (20 Watts) in the bands between 1 GHz and 10 GHz; and,
• +40 dBm (10 Watts) in the frequency bands above 10 GHz, except in the band
18.6-18.8 GHz where the limit is +27 dBm (0.5 Watts) in accordance with
International Radio Regulation 21.5A.
It should be noted that in the band 18.6-18.8 GHz, multiple transmitters, operating on
different RF carrier frequencies, individually respecting the above output power limit
can be connected to a single antenna of a fixed service.
Microwave fixed services operated in Australia must conform with the above power
limits and the EIRP limit criteria detailed in Appendix 5 “Geostationary Satellite
Orbit Avoidance”.
In general, transmit power levels should be adjusted to ensure that radiated power levels
do not significantly exceed that necessary for compliance with link availability and
performance objectives. Transmit power levels may be controlled through the judicious
application of fixed attenuators or, with the emerging generation of fixed service radio
equipment, direct programming and Adaptive Transmit Power Control (ATPC).
ATPC is a desirable equipment feature of digital systems with significant benefits11
for the system operator and spectrum manager. In essence, ATPC allows transmitter
operation at less than maximum power for most of the time, with increased power
applied only (for short percentages of time) during periods of fading. The rules and
conditions governing the operation of microwave fixed service systems fitted with
ATPC is detailed in Appendix 9 “Adaptive Transmit Power Control”.
3.2.3 Emission Criteria
In general, the relative power spectral density of a given radiofrequency emission12 is
determined by the baseband information rate, the modulation technique employed and
10
ie. At the actual waveguide flange or coaxial connection point of the antenna itself.
11
As outlined in Chapter 4.3.4.2 of ITU-R “Handbook on Digital Radio Relay Systems”, Geneva 1996.
12
Defined in the ITU Radio Regulations as the radiation produced by a radio transmitting station.

11
system implementation (eg. DSP techniques and filtering). Such emissions may be
defined as consisting of two components
• the major “wanted signal” portion of the transmitted spectra, normally defined as
the necessary bandwidth13. The necessary bandwidth is a key parameter in
frequency coordination and its value is recorded in the ACA's RADCOM database
as part of the emission designator field used to characterise the nature of a given
radiocommunication service; and
• a remainder (unwanted emissions), falling outside of the necessary bandwidth.
Unwanted emissions include out-of-band and spurious emissions, as defined in the
International Radio Regulations.
In general, it is expected that the necessary bandwidth of a fixed service emission is

wholly contained within the RF channel limits of the relevant Appendix 1 channel
arrangement. However, for high capacity digital systems operating in specific bands
(3.8, 6.7 and 11 GHz), the necessary bandwidth is permitted to exceed the relevant RF
channel limits by up to 20%.
Wanted and unwanted emission criteria for microwave fixed services are subject to
review. Pending development of Appendix 3, enquiries regarding this matter should
be directed to the Spectrum Engineering Section, Spectrum Planning Branch.
3.2.4 Antennas
Minimum antenna performance requirements for Australian microwave fixed services
are specified in Appendix 11 for each frequency band and are further discussed under
Part 3.1.4 “Antenna Requirements”. Antennas are a critical component within the
overall interference environment and their characteristics play a large part in
determining overall frequency re-use for fixed services. Accordingly, it is essential
that licensees should furnish detailed radiation pattern envelope (RPE) data for their
(discrete and equipment integral) antenna products that are to be used in proposed
assignments. Parameters should include an antenna’s physical diameter and on-axis
gain as well as the antenna 360 radiation pattern envelope for both co-polar and
cross-polar orientation, in order to facilitate their use in detailed frequency
coordination and sharing studies.
In order to promote standardisation and electronic working methods (and in the

absence of relevant ITU criteria), the “Standard Format for Electronic Transfer of
Terrestrial Antenna Pattern Data” file data format developed by the National
Spectrum Managers Association (NSMA14) may be utilised, with a view to facilitating
simple, accurate and expedient transfer of coordination data between manufacturers,
frequency assigners and users. Although not a formal standard, the format is
recognised and supported by most major antenna manufacturers.
13
Necessary bandwidth is defined in the International Radio Regulations as “the width of the frequency
band which is just sufficient to ensure the transmission of information at the rate and with the quality
required under specified conditions”.
14
NSMA (USA) Working Group 16, refer to http://www.nsma.org.

12
3.3 RADIOCOMMUNICATION SITE AND SYSTEM PLANNING CONSIDERATIONS

Site selection and detailed radiocommunication system engineering issues are
normally matters within the jurisdiction of the system planner and prospective
licensee. Nevertheless, a number of geographic and other link planning
considerations are of concern from a regulatory perspective and require detailed
treatment due to their potential impact on the overall interference environment.
Accordingly, in order to facilitate timely system commissioning and to avoid

potentially costly redesign work, the matters discussed in the following sub-parts need
to be considered and taken into account within the early phases of link planning.
3.3.1 Geographic Coordinates

As outlined under Part 4.2.2, the coordination of microwave fixed services is
predicated upon the accurate determination of the relative spatial (distance and
azimuth) relationships between potential victim and interfering services.
Since the reliability of predicted signal levels will be affected by the uncertainty of the
geographic coordinates used, it is important that the link end-point location
coordinates are derived and recorded accurately. The endpoints in the context of
microwave fixed services are defined as the coordinates at the centre or main axis of
the antenna support structure (ie. pole or tower). In the case of particularly large
support structures (ie. where the radius distance from the antenna to the axis is greater
than 10 metres) the coordinates of the actual antenna are to be recorded, consistent
with the specified (see below) level of accuracy of coordinate data.
Geographic coordinates for radiocommunication sites are recorded in the Australian

Map Grid (AMG) format, a Universal Transverse Mercator projection of latitudes and
longitudes on the Australian Geodetic Datum (AGD). Conversion algorithms
between latitude and longitude and AMG coordinates are detailed in “The Australian
Geodetic Datum Technical Manual (National Mapping Council 1986)”.
The ACMA's “Site Entry Rules” Business Operating Procedure (BOP) document
provides guidance regarding the derivation and recording of radiocommunication site
data and specifies that site data entered into the ACMA's RRL database should aim
for an accuracy of +/- 10 metres (equivalent to approximately 0.3 of a second of
latitude). However, this may be relaxed to +/- 100 metres in rural and remote areas in
cases where better data may be unobtainable.
3.3.2 High Spectrum Demand Areas (HSDA)

Spectrum demand and high usage density typically coincide with population centres
and the trunk route corridors between such centres. Designated High Spectrum
Demand Areas (HSDA) define geographic boundaries within which the overall link
density is high and where demand mandates a tightly managed assignment strategy,
including strict compliance with the spectrum productivity related assignment and
system planning rules specified in this document.
Metropolitan HSDAs are circular areas defined by radii centred on the town or city
GPO coordinates, as specified in Table 3.1 and shown in Figure 3.1.
Location Location AMG coordinates HSDA radius (km)

13
Zone Easting Northing f < 10 GHz f  10 GHz

Sydney 56 334100 6250900 140 95
Melbourne 55 320630 5812740 140 95
Brisbane 56 502810 6961540 130 85
Adelaide 54 280575 6132250 70 45
Perth 50 392022 6464195 100 65
Canberra 55 693400 6093700 90 60
Newcastle 56 384696 6355416 130 85
Table 3.1. Designated High Spectrum Demand Areas (HSDA)
Although HSDAs are not explicitly defined for the major trunk routes, coordination
and planning rule criteria should also be closely observed along the intercapital trunk
and other routes making extensive use of the bands below 10 GHz.
Note: The Table 3.1 microwave fixed service HSDA definitions are not the same as,
and are not necessarily intended to be consistent with, the definitions given in the
ACA's “Radiocommunications Apparatus Licence Fees and Charges” document.
Figure 3.1. Designated HSDA for microwave fixed service bands below 10 GHz.

14
3.3.3 Compatibility (Site Sense)15

The majority of microwave fixed services are bidirectional and for this reason
radiofrequency channel arrangements are defined in paired blocks of “go” and
“return” channels (i.e. designated 1/1', 2/2' ...), separated in frequency by a fixed
“transmit/receive duplex spacing”, in accordance with the principles defined in ITU-R
Recommendation F.746 “Radio-frequency Channel Arrangements for Radio-Relay
Systems”.
In order to maximise the isolation between collocated transmitters and receivers
operating in the same band, at any given site, frequencies are assigned from either the
lower (site sense “low”) or the higher (site sense “high”) frequency block.
Accordingly, where a given site has been designated as “transmit high” then all
transmit frequencies at that site will be in the upper frequency block and the
corresponding paired duplex receive frequencies in the lower “receive low” block.
Figure 3.2 provides a simple (arbitrary) example of a network with consistent site
sense allocation.
7
7 '
3 '
5
3
1 '
5 '
KEY
1
S it e S ense "High"
S it e S ense "Low"
Figure 3.2. An arbitrary example of a site sense consistent network.
The collocation of transmitters and receivers using the same frequency block must be
avoided, since the high levels of adjacent channel energy are highly likely to cause
receiver desensitisation16. The extent of desensitisation depends upon the absolute
frequency separation between a transmitter and the victim receiver and its effect may
range from a small reduction in available system fade margin through increasing
baseband noise to severe blocking where the receiver becomes essentially inoperative.
15
In the 3.8 GHz band site sense compatibility is not required if co-sited parties can reach an
agreement.
16
ie. results in a reduction in the dynamic range of the receiver.

15
The following cases outline the site sense considerations most often encountered in
practice:
• for an isolated single-hop link, the choice of relative transmit/receive site sense is
not usually of particular importance;
• in the case of a radio-relay trunk route or any multi-hop system, site sense
alternates at each hop, with the initial choice of upper or lower frequency block
selection typically influenced by any sites where the new route interconnects with
existing systems for which a site sense has already been established; and
• network node sites, or “prime” sites where multiple systems converge. Consistent
application of site sense is particularly important at node sites, since conflicts
invariably preclude the use of otherwise available radiofrequency channels.
In addition, the harmonic relationships between co-sited equipment operating in

different frequency bands must be taken into account, i.e. multiples of the transmit
frequencies from a lower band falling within the receive frequency block of a higher
band represent a particularly severe source of interference.
Incorrectly applied site sense may lead to extensive and unreasonable spectrum
denial, particularly at high demand prime radiocommunication sites which are often
shared between a number of operators. Accordingly, appropriate consideration at the
route/network planning stage is vital in ensuring that potential problems of this nature
are avoided. Nevertheless, in certain circumstances it may not be possible to maintain
site sense when making a new frequency assignment (eg. when a new link connects
existing sites with identical pre-established site sense). In this case and other
situations where individual circumstances warrant the violation of normal site sense
practice, the proposed assignment strategy should be carefully examined with a view
to minimising the adverse impact of such an assignment. In many cases, through
judicious site sense planning and choice of assigned channels, a site sense violation
can be effectively “transferred” to a part of the network (site) where the potential
impact on other existing and future systems may be minimised.
If a mixed site sense is proposed at a shared radiocommunication facility (or adjacent

facilities), it is the licence applicant’s responsibility to advise and to negotiate with
any potentially affected parties, including the site owner(s) or their designated
representative(s). In cases where operators are unable to reach agreement, the site
owner(s) may choose to arbitrate or to impose an outcome. In the event of an
unresolved disagreement between respective site owners, the parties involved may
seek the advice of the ACMA.
Other on-site interference and compatibility issues (intermodulation, broadband noise)

are outside the scope of this frequency coordination document and fall under the
scope of individual site engineering practice. For guidance regarding such site
engineering related matters, reference may be made to Australian Standard AS 3516.2
“Siting of radiocommunications facilities - Part 2 Guidelines for fixed, mobile and
broadcasting facilities at frequencies above 30 MHz” and general radio and
telecommunication engineering references.

16
3.3.4 Link Diversity Options

Link diversity arrangements and other measures are utilised to improve system
performance, typically to combat the effects of multi-path fading and to expand the
application of link arrangements over hops with difficult propagation conditions. As
outlined in ITU-R Recommendation F.752 “Diversity Techniques for Radio-Relay
Systems”, the traditional microwave fixed service diversity techniques are generically
described as frequency diversity and space diversity:
• frequency diversity, employing two or more frequencies to send identical

information over the same propagation path. The frequency separation17 must be
large enough to ensure that the effects of multipath fading on the two discrete
signals are sufficiently de-correlated; and
• space diversity, usually implemented with two or more receiving antennas with a
vertical separation large enough to provide separate signal paths in which the
impairments due to multi-path fading are sufficiently de-correlated.
In addition to the above recommendation, Chapter 4.3 of the ITU-R “Handbook on

Digital Radio Relay Systems” provides useful guidance regarding the various diversity
options and countermeasures available to the system planner, including an extensive
listing of relevant references.
From a spectrum utilisation perspective, the use of frequency diversity represents an

inefficient use of a limited spectrum resource, especially at locations where spectrum
availability is a concern and where other viable diversity options are available.
As discussed in Annex 1 to ITU-R Recommendation F.1093 “Effects of Multipath

Propagation on the Design and Operation of Line-of-Sight Digital Radio-Relay
Systems”, space diversity is one of the most effective methods of combating multipath
fading and improvements in path reliability offered by space diversity are at least
equivalent to that of frequency diversity. Accordingly, from a spectrum utilisation
perspective, the application of space diversity techniques should be considered in
preference to frequency diversity.
In view of the above considerations, the use of frequency diversity is permitted only
in situations where individual circumstances warrant the application of
hybrid/multiple diversity methods (eg. extended hops over water or remote areas
where spectrum demand is low) or where systems employ more than one active
channel over a single path (i.e. one standby channel can be used for N active channels,
where N > 1).
Note: The limitation on the application of frequency diversity will not normally be
relaxed within designated HSDA locations.
3.3.5 Passive and “RF” repeaters

For the system planner, passive repeaters are sometimes a useful option in cases
where the direct propagation path is severely obstructed (typically near end), but
where another site, with path clearance to both ends of the wanted communication
17
Typically 3 to 5 % of the RF operating frequency.

17
link, can be used to direct sufficient signal energy around the obstacle to satisfy the
overall system gain requirement. The most common types of passive repeaters
include “back-to-back” antennas and “billboard” reflectors. A typical back-to-back
configuration is demonstrated in Figure 3.3, where antennas with different azimuths
are simply coupled together.
Ba c k t o B ac k
Ant enna s
B C
A D
Fig 3.3 Passive repeater employing back-to-back antennas.
The total path losses via the repeater are calculated as the sum of losses (in dB) of the
two individual hops. The transmit signal level (at the antenna connector) of the
second hop is equal to the received signal level (at the antenna connector) of the first
hop, less the attenuation (typically around 0.5 dB) of the intermediate feeder and
connectors. The unwanted signal is the sum of the interferences received via each
receiving antenna. For each potential interference source, separate calculations are
required for each antenna involving separate discrimination angles. In order to reduce
coupling to the direct (potentially interfering) propagation path, the antennas of the
two radio paths are always orthogonally polarised.
Figure 3.4 demonstrates a passive repeater configuration implemented by the

installation of a flat “billboard” reflector of a size commensurate with practical
dimensional constraints and the need to obtain a reasonable system fade margin.
Ref lec t or
Fig 3.4 “Billboard” reflector passive repeater.

18
As with the back-to-back antenna case, path losses are calculated separately for each
hop and interference can occur via the direct paths and the reflector. The gain of the
reflector is given18 by:

G = 21.45 + 20 log(f) + 10 log [ A cos( )] (dB)
2
where:
f - frequency in GHz
A - actual area of the reflector in m2; and
 - angle between the incident and reflected beams
Passive repeaters offer practical and economic communication solutions in many

situations. Nevertheless, their application is typically constrained by path geometry
and terrain considerations. In addition to the need to obtain adequate system gain
under normal operating conditions, the planner must ensure that the direct path signal
(ie. an unwanted signal) remains well below the system threshold during periods of
abnormal propagation.
RF repeaters are sometimes utilised to improve overall system gain of the otherwise
“passive” or non-frequency translating repeater. The typical RF repeater consists of a
class A linear amplifier inserted between the antenna ports of the intermediate
repeater. Bidirectional RF amplification with a single amplifier block may be
achieved using appropriate passband filtering, circulators and careful design, ensuring
that sufficient isolation exists between “go/return” directions for stable operation.
From a spectrum utilisation and interference management perspective, passive and RF

repeaters exhibit several potentially undesirable characteristics:
• Given the constraints on system gain (high overall path loss), systems utilising
passive repeaters operate with characteristically low margins, necessitating
significantly more stringent interference protection levels than other links;
• Such systems are susceptible to (cumulative) interference entering at multiple
locations and azimuths;
• Since passive repeaters are “non-frequency translating”, significant problems can
arise with respect to established network “site sense” criteria (see Part 3.3.3),
particularly in situations where the passive repeater itself is collocated with other
radiocommunication services operating within the same band; and
• RF repeaters will amplify any signal above the noise floor within the passband of
its filters, including unwanted signals from other systems.
In accordance with “Economic and Technical Aspects of the Choice of Transmission Systems”,
18
Appendix to Section B IV3 of the Handbook, ITU Geneva 1971.

19
All of these factors contribute (in varying degrees) to spectrum denial. Accordingly,
the ACMA will not normally support the use of passive or RF repeaters within
designated HSDA, at prime19 radiocommunication sites or other locations where their
use may unreasonably impact upon the availability of spectrum to other users.
3.4 POINT-MULTIPOINT FIXED SERVICES

Several Australian fixed service allocations are designated for use by point-to-
multipoint fixed services:
• The 1.5 GHz (1427-1535 MHz) Point-to-Multipoint Services band, supporting

rural and remote area public telecommunication services20; and
• The 3.4 GHz (3425-3492.5 MHz) band, supporting Wireless Local Loop (WLL)
services.
3.4.1 Rural telephony (1.5 GHz DRCS) systems

DRCS point-to-multipoint systems are extensively deployed in rural and remote areas
of Australia, facilitating the delivery of basic telecommunication services to locations
where other service delivery mechanisms are impractical or too costly to implement.
Australian rural telephony systems principally utilise the 1.5 GHz (1427-1535 MHz)
DRCS band, although in some areas 500 MHz and “hybrid” 500/1500 MHz systems
also operate. Spectrum within the band 1427-1535 MHz is shared between DRCS
and regular point-to-point fixed services and, in accordance with the RF Channel
Arrangements detailed in Appendix 1, separate but overlaid arrangements are
specified for point-to-point and multipoint systems. As noted in Appendix 1, the
operation of DRCS and other 1.5 GHz radiocommunication services is subject to the
provisions of the “1.5 GHz Band Plan”, December 1996.
Given the inherent spectrum denial of DRCS hub stations (due to their
omnidirectional antennas) and the unmanageable nature of potential interference
between point-to-point links and uncoordinated DRCS outstations, the deployment of
1.5 GHz point-to-multipoint systems is not normally permitted within designated
HSDA and operation in other areas with high point-to-point link densities should be
avoided. All applications seeking point-to-multipoint operation within the band
1427-1535 MHz and which encroach upon designated HSDA must be referred to the
Manager, Spectrum Planning and Engineering Team, Radiofrequency Planning Group
for policy advice.
Specific guidance regarding the coordination of DRCS point-to-multipoint outstations

with point-to-point links is provided in Appendix 8 “Coordination of DRCS
Outstations with Point-to-Point Links”.
19
ie. Main trunk route or other shared use radiocommunication sites.
20
Digital Radio Concentrator System (DRCS).

20
This page has been left intentionally blank

21
4. FREQUENCY COORDINATION
This part of the RALI FX 3 provides an overview of the coordination process,

outlines a basic method of frequency coordination for homogeneous microwave fixed
services and suggests more detailed approaches which may facilitate successful
coordination and improved spectrum utility. Guidance is also provided for the
coordination of microwave fixed services with other types of radiocommunication
services.
The basic method and other approaches outlined in this part seek to identify the key
technical considerations which need to be taken into account as part of the
coordination process. Other than the requirement of compliance with any mandatory
assignment instructions21, spectrum management related planning requirements and
good engineering practice, the coordination methodology outlined is not intended to
be prescriptive. It is accepted that there will be some variation in the implementation
of coordination methods, which in some instances may be manual but more often are
reliant on the application of integrated database tools, additional information and
computer based modelling techniques.
4.1 AN OVERVIEW OF THE COORDINATION PROCESS

The purpose of the microwave fixed service frequency coordination process is to
determine the compatibility of a proposed new fixed link service with existing
services operating on a particular channel frequency in a given geographical area.
Depending upon individual circumstances, coordination may be required for a single
new link or a complete network/radio-relay route. For the purposes of description,
the coordination of multiple fixed links may be considered as simply an extension of
the principles given for a single fixed microwave service.
Accurate information regarding the technical and operational characteristics of the

proposed new system and any potentially affected services must be available before
the coordination process can be properly invoked. Data for existing licensed services
may be obtained from the ACMA's RRL database. The technical details of any
proposed new link will normally be provided by the prospective licensee as part of a
licence application. Typically, the following should be considered as the minimum
data set necessary to initiate the most basic level of coordination:
• the applicant's preferred frequency band;

• geographic coordinates (location) of the transmit and receive sites;
• system type/capacity/emission details;
• nominal mean (coordinated) transmit power; and
• antenna type and characteristics.
21
As specified in Appendix 1 for each fixed link frequency band.
FX 3 Part 4 - Frequency Coordination June 2023

22
The accuracy of the coordination data should be consistent with the level of
confidence necessary for a proper assessment against the applicable interference
management criteria. In cases where the available information falls short of the
necessary level of confidence to constitute a valid assessment, further advice should
be sought from the licence applicant. However, it is recognised that it is often
difficult to obtain timely detailed information and under some circumstances it may
be acceptable, depending upon the level of spectrum utility sought, to make
conservative assumptions regarding specific coordination parameters.
The following sub-parts outline the basic method of frequency coordination.
4.2 BASIC METHOD OF FREQUENCY COORDINATION FOR TERRESTRIAL FIXED

SERVICES
The basic method of frequency coordination applicable to proposed new terrestrial
fixed service systems is outlined as follows:
1. Identify all homogeneous microwave fixed services operating within the

coordination area of the proposed new service that may affect or be affected by the
deployment of the proposed new service;
2. Calculate the wanted signal and interference levels to/from the proposed new
service and the existing services within the coordination area;
3. Evaluate the compatibility of the proposed new link by comparing the calculated
levels of interference against the relevant interference management criteria;
4. Check the compliance of the proposed assignment against the relevant specific
assignment instructions and general spectrum policy requirements; and
5. Consider any relevant inter-service and non-homogeneous fixed service
coordination requirements, including geostationary orbit protection in the bands
shared with space radiocommunication services.
An overview of the basic method of frequency coordination is given in the flowchart

in Figure 4.1. A detailed discussion of the method and related considerations is
provided in the following sub-parts.
In addition to the coordination methodologies and requirements discussed in this part

of the RALI, the user is also reminded of the need to consider and take account of the
general radiocommunication policy requirements detailed in Part 3 “Coordination
and System Planning Rules”.

23
Select a channel for frequency coordination :

consider compliance with Assignment Instructions
and Planning Rules.
Complies with Assignment

Instructions and Planning Rules?
no
yes
Identify all potentially affected services:
Obtain data on existing services operating within the frequency range and
coordination area of the proposed new fixed service.
no
Any services identified?
yes
no
Fixed point-to-point service?
yes
Consider, as a minimum, services whose transmit/receive bandwidth is
co-channel or within an affected adjacent channel of the frequency under
consideration.
Distance Calculation
Determine the distances/azimuths of the wanted and unwanted signal paths
for each identified fixed link receiver.
Discrimination Loss Calculation

Determine the antenna discrimination loss between the proposed system and
each identified fixed link.
Initial Propagation Loss Calculation:

Calculate the basic free-space loss for the wanted and unwanted path for each
identified fixed link receiver.
Wanted and Unwanted Power Calculation

Calculate the wanted and unwanted power at each identified fixed link
receiver (using nominal values where appropriate).
Interference Management Criteria

Determine the applicable interference management criteria for each identified
fixed link receiver.
Is the ratio of
wanted to unwanted signal > interference
management criteria (ie. is the level of interference
yes acceptable)?
no
Propagation Loss Re-calculation

Examine the interference path(s), taking into account the terrain and other
obstructions, to determine the most appropriate propagation model and
re-calculate propagation losses. It may also be necessary to refine relevant
parameters such as antenna discrimination, etc.
Unwanted Power Re-calculation

Re-calculate unwanted power to each identified fixed link receiver.
no
Is the ratio of
wanted to unwanted signal > interference
management criteria (ie. is the level of interference
acceptable)?
yes
Consider inter-service and non-homogeneous fixed
service coordination requirements
Consider any relevant requirements including GSO
protection in bands shared with the space
radiocommunications services (Consult other RALIs).
Successful coordination with

non-homogeneous fixed and other
services?
no
yes
Un-successful Frequency Coordination

Successful Frequency Coordination
Choose an alternate channel or frequency band.
Figure 4.1. An overview of the basic method of frequency coordination.

24
4.2.1 Identifying potentially affected services

In order to effectively identify existing microwave fixed services which may affect,
or be affected by, the deployment of a proposed new service it is necessary to
establish:
• the frequency limits applicable to the coordination - normally being at least one
full channelwidth22 on either side of the channel centre frequency being
coordinated
(ie. co-channel and the first adjacent channel, with channelwidth as defined in the
relevant RF Channel Arrangement); and
• a coordination area, geographically defining the extent of necessary coordination.
The purpose of identifying a coordination area is to facilitate a reduction in the size of

the dataset of services to be coordinated, by excluding from further consideration the
services located outside of a defined coordination area and for which detailed
interference studies should be unnecessary. A coordination area is defined by a
radius distance, centred upon the respective sites of the proposed new link (i.e. a
separate coordination area is defined for each end of the link). Recommended
minimum coordination radius distances for the 1.5 to 50 GHz bands are given in
Table 4.1.
f (GHz) Coordination Radius (km)

1.5  f < 10 200
10  f < 20 150
20  f 100
Table 4.1 Recommended minimum coordination distances.
In practice, the generic distances in Table 4.1 should be adequate for most cases.
However, the given coordination radii represent a necessary compromise between the
need to identify significant potential interference sources/victims and the burden of
unnecessary coordination23. Thus, a small but finite probability exists that a proposed
new fixed link may interfere with or receive interference from a station located
beyond the above defined coordination distance. Clearly, that risk is greater in
situations where high (victim and/or interferer) site elevations are involved. In such
cases, it is appropriate to extend the coordination area in the direction of the boresight
azimuth of the proposed new service.
No universal coordination area model exists which can be confidently used under all
circumstances and variations in approach may be necessary to account for local
factors such as band specific equipment, terrain and geoclimatic statistics. In some
cases, where these factors are known and well defined, it may be useful to develop a
detailed coordination area model adapted for, and taking account of, local topography
and propagation conditions. An example of such an approach is described in ITU-R
Recommendation F.1095 “A Procedure for Determining Coordination Area Between
22
Also taking account of any overlap with superseded or overlaid existing channel arrangements.
23
Note: This is not necessarily of great concern, eg. if computer based coordination methods are used
then doubling the coordination radius distance may only result in a marginal increase in overall
processing time.

25
Radio-Relay Stations of the Fixed Services”. The majority of microwave fixed

services are bidirectional, utilising separate go/return channels as defined in the
relevant RF Channel Arrangements. Accordingly, the interference scenario is unique
for each direction of transmission and interference to/from the proposed new system
needs to be evaluated separately for each operating frequency.
A typical example of a potential interference scenario (for one direction of

transmission, ie. a single frequency) is presented in Figure 4.2, where link 'AB'
designates an existing service and link 'CD' is a proposed new service. The potential
interference paths (AD & CB), with the corresponding transmit and receive antenna
discrimination angles ( and  respectively) relative to the respective antenna
“boresight” azimuths are also shown. Since fixed links predominantly employ
directional antennas, the relative azimuths of the interference source and the victim
antennas are a key factor in establishing the relationship between interference and the
wanted signal.
TX(f1)
TX(f1)
A C

 
RX(f1) R X(f1)
D B
 Transmit antenna
discrimination angle
Receive antenna

discrimination angle
A B - Existing service route
C D - Proposed servce route
Interference path
Figure 4.2. Example of wanted signal (AB, CD) and interference paths (AD, CB)

26
In practice, the typical coordination scenario is much more complicated than the
simple example shown and care needs to be taken to ensure that all potentially
significant interference source paths are adequately identified and assessed. The
effective interference power level at any potential victim receiver is equal to the sum
of the individual interference entries (see Part 4.2.3). However, unless two or more
entries are of a similar order (i.e. of equivalent power), the worst case interferer will
typically emerge as the dominant element of the coordination.
Note: Calculation algorithms for path distance, antenna azimuths and other relevant
coordinate geometry related information are detailed in the “Australian Geodetic
Datum Technical Manual”, National Mapping Council 1986. Input data into such
calculations should take account of the considerations outlined in Part 3.3.1
“Geographic Coordinates”.
4.2.2 Calculating received signal levels

The received (wanted or unwanted) signal power can be expressed as:
Pr = Pt + Gt - Lt - Lb + Gr - Lr
where :
Pr - RF signal power at the input to the receiver (dBm);
Pt - RF signal power at the output of the transmitter (dBm);
Gt - gain of the transmitting antenna in the azimuth of the receiver (dBi);
Lt - feeder and branching losses associated with the transmitter (dB);
Lb - total transmission loss between the transmit and receive antennas (dB);
Gr - gain of the receiving antenna in the azimuth of the transmitter (dBi);
Lr - feeder and branching losses associated with the receiver (dB).
The above parameters are discussed in detail in the following sub-parts.
Transmit power (Pt)

The transmit power24 is the nominal mean (coordinated) power level to which the
transmitter is set during system commissioning. The level is measured at the
transmitter output port, but the actual power level thus obtained must be reduced by
an amount equal to any fixed attenuator fitted between the output port and the antenna
feed system. Note that for fixed systems operating with ATPC, the coordinated
transmit power may be significantly less than the system maximum transmit power –
refer to Appendix 9 “Adaptive Transmit Power Control” for details.
24
Hard limits apply in respect to the maximum power that may be delivered to the antenna of a fixed
service system (refer to Part 3.2.2).

27
Net fixed losses (Lt and Lr)

Includes transmission line and any branching losses associated with combiners,
connectors and any special antenna feed system configuration (eg. hot standby)
arrangements. These fixed losses may be considered insignificant and disregarded in
the case of terminals with integral antennas.
However, for systems utilising separate feeder/antenna arrangements, transmission

line and branching losses are significant and their magnitude can potentially
determine the success or failure of individual instances of coordination. Waveguide is
normally associated with microwave fixed services, but air and foam dielectric
coaxial feeders are also common in the lower bands.
The end-to-end attenuation of a transmission line is dependent upon the frequency of

operation, the length of the line and the actual type of line used. Accordingly,
transmission line attenuation should be calculated using the manufacturers loss per
unit length (normally dB/metre) specification for the actual waveguide/coaxial
feedline used, at the frequency of operation. Thus fixed losses may be calculated as:
L = d +  (dB)
where:
L = net fixed loss (dB) at the transmit (L t ) or receive (L r ) end of a link;

 = specific attenuation (per metre) of the feeder, as per manufacturers data;
d = length of the feeder run (metres); and
B = Total branching losses (dB), as per manufacturers specification.
If the length of the feeder run (from the antenna flange to the equipment) is not
already established, then a reasonable estimate may be obtained using:
d = ha - hg + 11 + l2 (metres)
where:
ha = height of the antenna on the tower;

hg = height of the feeder gantry above the base of the tower;
l1 = length of the feeder gantry from the tower to the hut; and
l2 = length of the feeder tail to the waveguide flange/coaxial connection.
Note: The ACMA's current RRL assignment database does not record such fixed
losses. Accordingly, under the basic method of coordination and pending the
incorporation of such information into the database, the assumption must be made that
wanted and unwanted signals are attenuated to the same degree (ie. the same C/I ratio
is maintained) and accounted for through reciprocity.

28
Antenna parameters (Gt , Gr )

Microwave fixed services normally utilise linearly polarised parabolic antennas with a
circularly symmetric response about their main axis of radiation (boresight azimuth).
Antenna response is typically described in terms of a Radiation Pattern Envelope
(RPE), providing an estimate of antenna gain relative to its on-axis gain (Go), for the
full (360) range of azimuths and for the two orthogonally polarised components of
the radiated signal.
In evaluating a system link budget (ie. the wanted signal level), only the on-axis gains
(Go) of the co-polar transmit and receive antennas need to be considered since
reciprocal azimuths are involved, ie. the net effective link antenna gain (transmit +
receive) is simply the sum Gt + Gr . The value of Go may or may not be the same in
each case, depending upon the actual antennas used at each end of a link.
However, in the case of an interference path, the effective gains of the interfering and
victim antennas in the direction of the interference path may be expressed in terms of
the on-axis gain (Got and Gor for the transmitter and receiver respectively) and a
reduction factor proportional to a discrimination angle:
Gt = Got - G (at the transmitter); and
Gr = Gor - G (at the victim receiver).
Here the parameters  and  refer to the difference between the respective boresight
and interference path azimuths, as shown in the example in Figure 4.2. The actual
discrimination (dB) value for a given angle is obtained using the antenna RPE.
In cases where the interference source and victim antennas are cross-polarised, both of
the orthogonal components of antenna gain need to be considered, corresponding to:
• the cross-polar response of the victim receive antenna to the component of signal
radiated on the intended polarity by the transmitting antenna; and
• the co-polar response of the victim receive antenna to the component of signal
radiated on the unintended polarity by the transmitting antenna.
Thus in the cross-polar case, it is necessary to evaluate the co-polar and cross-polar
components of the transmit and receive angles at their respective discrimination
angles. The net effective antenna gain (transmit + receive) in the direction of the
interference path is given by:
 (G tH 10+ G rH ) (G tV + G rV )

10 log 10 + 10 10 
(Gt + Gr) =   (dB)
 
where the terms GtH, GrH and GtV, GrV are parameters for the respective horizontally
(H) and vertically (V) polarised components of the transmit and receive antenna gain
in the interference path azimuth.

29
Calculating transmission loss (Lb)

The total transmission loss (Lb) between two ideal antennas, can be summarised25 as
consisting of two principal components:
• a (time invariant) basic free space loss (Lbf); and

• additional attenuation due to terrain, atmospheric absorption and other physical
attributes associated with a particular propagation path (Lm).
The total transmission loss is then given by:
Lb = Lbf + Lm (dB)
For the basic method, path clearance over the wanted signal path is assumed and for
an initial assessment, often only the free-space loss (coupled with antenna
discrimination) over the wanted and unwanted signal paths needs to be considered. If
the corresponding level of interference complies with the specified interference
management criteria, then more complex propagation analyses involving the Lm
component need not be initiated. The free-space loss may be calculated using the
formula:
Lbf = 32.4 + 20logf + 20logd (dB)
where: f - frequency (MHz); and

d - distance (km).
In cases where the levels calculated with the free-space model exceed the relevant
interference management criteria, detailed propagation models characterising the
nature of the Lm component may be invoked. Application of the appropriate
propagation model/s is important in obtaining an accurate representation of this
component of transmission loss. Fixed service propagation models based on relevant
ITU-R recommendations are outlined in Appendix 4 “Fixed service propagation
modelling”
4.2.3 Assessing received signal levels against interference management criteria

For the basic method of frequency coordination, a generic interference management
methodology and criteria based on the concept of a Protection Ratio (PR) is adopted.
The PR defines a minimum ratio of the relative levels of wanted and unwanted
(interference) signals at the input port of the (potential) victim receiver. The
protection ratios required for the coordination of analogue and digital systems are
defined in Appendix 1 for each microwave frequency band.
The wanted-to-unwanted signal power ratio at the input of a potential victim receiver
is given by:
W
(dB) = Wanted signal power (dBm) - Unwanted signal power (dBm)
U
25
As outlined in ITU-R Recommendation P.341-4 “The concept of Transmission Loss for Radio Links”.

30
The unwanted signal power represents an aggregate interference level the value of
which is obtained through the summation of individual interference entries:
 k U10k 
U = 10 log  1 10  (dBm)
 
where k=1 defines the case where a single source is deemed dominant.
The wanted to unwanted signal ratio is then compared against the relevant protection
ratios defined in Appendix 1. For a successful coordination, this ratio must be greater
than the protection ratio, ie. the following relation must be satisfied:
W
 *PR
U
* NOTE: For digital systems, appropriate corrections must be applied to the

normalised (for a specific path length) PR values given in the Appendix 1 tables,
using the correction factor graphs also provided in Appendix 1 for each frequency
band. The correction takes account of the victim system’s actual path length and its
geographic location in terms of the relevant worst month multipath fading statistics PL
(%) and/or rainfall intensity rate R (mm/hr), as determined using the geoclimatic
contour maps26 provided in Annex A to Appendix 1.
4.2.4 Compliance with assignment instructions and planning rules

In addition to the assessment of interference levels and interference management
criteria, it is necessary to ensure that the proposed new fixed link service complies
with the relevant assignment instructions (including any special notes) specified in
Appendix 1 and the planning rules detailed in Part 3 (eg. “site sense”, diversity
options). Where specific references are included as part of an assignment instruction
(eg. to other administrative instructions or statutory instruments, which includes
embargoes and legally binding band plans), then the requirements of such documents
must also be taken into account, unless clearly of an advisory nature (eg. RF channel
arrangement source recommendations).
A discussion of the application of Assignment Instructions and other relevant

spectrum management and fixed service engineering policy matters is provided under
Part 3 “Coordination and System Planning Rules”. Additionally, circumstances under
which variations in the (RALI) specified fixed service policy may be supported, are
discussed in Appendix 6 “Application of Assignment Policy Rules”.
4.2.5 Coordination with other types of radiocommunication services

Most of the spectrum allocations utilised by microwave fixed services are shared with
various other (fixed and non-fixed) types of radiocommunication services27.
Accordingly, in addition to the specific coordination procedures and criteria defined
26
As reproduced from ITU-R Recommendations P.453-5 “The Radio Refractive Index: its formula and
Refractivity Data” and P.837 “Characteristics of Precipitation for Propagation Modelling”.
27
As detailed in the “Australian Radiofrequency Spectrum Plan”.

31
in this document for the homogeneous fixed microwave service, it is also necessary to
consider:
• the potential for interference to/from other types of radiocommunication services

(ie. inter-service coordination and/or coordination with other types of non-
homogenous fixed services28); and
• the potential for interference to/from space radiocommunication services operating
in the Geostationary Orbit (GSO) and compliance with the relevant provisions of
Article 21 of the ITU Radio Regulations (on “orbit avoidance”).
Non-homogenous fixed and inter-service coordination

Specific RALIs exist to address some instances of the coordination of microwave
fixed services with non-homogenous fixed or other radiocommunication services, eg.
RALI MS 26 “Coordination of Microwave Fixed Services with Earth Stations”.
References to relevant RALI documents are incorporated within the assignment
instructions for each (Appendix 1) microwave fixed service band and a consolidated
list of such RALIs is included in the Reference section of this document. In addition
to the protection of the GSO (see Appendix 5) specific guidance on two particular
cases of coordination between the fixed service and non-homogenous fixed/other
services, is provided in the following appendices:
• Appendix 7 “Coordination of Apparatus Licences with Spectrum Licences:

1.8, 2.1 and 2.2 GHz Fixed Services”; and
• Appendix 8 “Coordination of DRCS Outstations with Point-to-Point Links”. Refer
also to Part 3.4.1 “Rural Telephony (1.5 GHz DRCS) Systems”.
28
For example, Multipoint Distribution Systems (MDS).

32
Due to the diversity and complexity of sharing situations which may arise, it is not
possible to provide rigorous and explicit procedures covering all coordination
requirements. In these cases, coordination defaults to the identification of all non-
homogeneous services in the band in question, followed by a manual assessment of
their impact on the interference environment.
Criteria defining the protection requirements of microwave fixed services are

provided in relevant ITU-R recommendations. In particular, ITU-R Recommendation
F.758 “Considerations in the development of criteria for sharing between the
terrestrial fixed service and other services” provides some useful generic guidance in
this regard. Guidance regarding the protection requirements of other
radiocommunication services may be obtained from the recommendations specific to
that service, such as the SF Series of recommendations which address sharing issues
between the fixed service and the fixed-satellite service.
Geostationary Satellite Orbit avoidance

Fixed services operating in the same frequency band/s as satellites in the
geostationary orbit are required to ensure that (fixed service) emissions do not cause
harmful interference to sensitive satellite receivers. Additionally, fixed service
receivers may suffer interference from space station emissions, depending upon the
fixed service receiver antenna azimuth/elevation and the power flux density (pfd) of
the space station emission at the location under consideration. Appendix 5
“Geostationary Satellite Orbit Avoidance” describes the restrictions on fixed service
azimuth and EIRP for all frequency bands in general, as well as for particular
frequency bands within which tighter restrictions apply. Additionally, a methodology
is described which facilitates a basic assessment of the long-term interference to the
fixed service which may be caused by emissions from satellites operating in the GSO.
4.3 CONSIDERATIONS WHICH MAY FACILITATE SUCCESSFUL COORDINATION

An unfavourable comparison of the wanted-to-unwanted signal power ratio against
the applicable protection ratio would indicate that coordination is not possible under
the given set of circumstances. In this case, the only available course of action may
be to attempt coordination within another channel or frequency band. However, it
must be remembered that the basic method of frequency coordination represents a
generic approach, intended to accommodate the criteria consolidated from a wide
range of fixed service systems. Accordingly, in many cases where an initial
assessment results in only a marginal failure against the relevant protection ratio, a
successful coordination may be facilitated through the application of measures such as
those described in the following paragraphs.
4.3.1 Detailed Interference Analyses

Detailed interference analyses may incorporate:
• a re-calculation of the transmission losses attributed to the interference path, based

on detailed terrain (ie. path profile) analyses and the application of relevant
propagation models, in accordance with the principles outlined in Appendix 4;

33
• a more rigorous interference management criteria assessment based on the specific

characteristics and protection requirements of the individual victim system
undergoing coordination;
• consideration of the relationship of the victim and interfering system power
spectral density functions, with consequent FDR (as outlined in Spectrum Planning
Report SPP 4/95); and
• a careful reconsideration/refinement of the other assumptions and factors used as
part of the initial assessment (eg. antenna angular and cross-polar discrimination,
fixed losses and other factors relevant to a particular case).
4.3.2 Interference Countermeasures

The incorporation of appropriate countermeasures as part of the detailed link planning
process may provide a critical contribution towards facilitating a successful
coordination. For example, such countermeasures may be implemented at the
interference source (transmit) and/or at the victim (receive) locations by:
• ensuring that full advantage is taken of antenna cross-polar discrimination, if not

already taken into account;
• increasing the system gain of the victim service, typically by installing antennas
with higher on-axis gain (ie. larger diameter parabolic dishes);
• increasing antenna discrimination in the azimuth of the interference path, for
example through the utilisation of higher performance antennas and/or by
deliberately exploiting near end path clearance to advantage (ie. antenna location
shielding); and
• reducing transmit power at the interfering system transmitter (i.e. by placing a
fixed attenuator between the transmitter output port and the antenna feed/branching
network), in cases where significant excess fade margin is available over the
wanted signal path (of the interfering system) or through the use of ATPC.
Of course the viability of the above (and other) countermeasures will depend upon
individual circumstances and should be considered in conjunction with the system
planner as part of the overall detailed link design.
RALI Authorisation
Barry Matson
Executive Manager
Spectrum Planning and Standards Group
Australian Communications Authority
Prepared by Spectrum Planning Section

CANBERRA 1998
1
GLOSSARY
BER - Bit Error Rate
CTS - Cordless Telecommunications Services
DRCS - Digital Radio Concentrator System
DSP - Digital Signal Processing
EIRP - Effective Isotropic Radiated Power
ENG - Electronic News Gathering
FDM/FM - Frequency Division Multiplex/Frequency Modulation
FDR - Frequency Dependant Rejection
GSO - Geostationary Orbit
HSDA - High Spectrum Demand Areas
LOS - Line of Sight
MDS - Multipoint Distribution Station
PDH - Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
RADCOM - The ACMA Radiocommunications licensing database
RPE - Radiation Pattern Envelope
SDH - Synchronous Digital Hierarchy
STL - Studio-to-Transmitter Link
TDM - Time Division Multiplex
TDMA - Time Division Multiple Access
TOB - Television Outside Broadcast
WLL - Wireless Local Loop
FX 3 Glossary June 2023

1
REFERENCES
This section consolidates the references incorporated as part of the RALI FX 3

“Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination” document, including detailed
Appendices. The following listing incorporates references to ACMA statutory and
administrative instruments, ITU Radio Regulations, relevant recommendations and
other standards. Further references and information resources are also provided for
material which may have been used during the development of the RALI and/or
which may be considered otherwise useful in the fixed service coordination context.
ACMA
“Radiocommunications Act 1992”.
“Australian Radiofrequency Spectrum Plan”.
“Radiocommunications Licence Conditions (Fixed) Licence Determination No.1 of 1997”.
“1.5GHz Band Plan”, December 1996.
“1.9 GHz Band Plan”, 14 March 1996.
“2.1 GHz Band Frequency Band Plan 2002”, 17 September 2003.
“Mobile Satellite Service (2GHz) Frequency Band Plan 2002”, 23 April 2002.
“Radiocommunications Apparatus Licence Fees and Charges”.
Spectrum Re-allocation Declaration No. 3 of 1997.
Spectrum Re-allocation Declaration No. 4 of 1997.
Information Paper "Principles for Decision Making".
"Radiocommunications (Spectrum Re-allocation) Declaration No. 2 of 2000."
"Radiocommunications (Spectrum Designation) Notice No.1 of 2000" [January 2000].
ACMA RALIs
FX 9 “Frequency Coordination of Fixed Links with Regional MDS Services”.
FX 14 “Point to Multipoint Fixed Services in Specified Parts of the 3.4-3.59 GHz Band”.
FX 18 “Frequency Coordination and Licensing Procedures for Fixed Wireless Access Services Sharing
the 1.9 GHz Band with Fixed Links”.
MS 3 “Spectrum Embargoes”.
MS 11 “Licence Text in RADCOM (Incorporating Special Conditions and Advisory Notes)”.
FX 3 References June 2023

2
MS 24 “Apparatus Licence Periods”.
MS 25 “Frequency Coordination and Licensing Procedures for Cordless Telecommunications Services

Sharing the 1.9 GHz Band with Fixed Links”.
MS 26 “Coordination of Microwave Fixed Services with Earth Stations”.
ACMA SPECTRUM PLANNING POLICY DOCUMENTS

SP 1/90, “Spectrum and Licensing Arrangements for Outside Broadcast Television Services” March
1990.
SP 5/90, “Notional Antenna Radiation Patterns”, Department of Transport and Communications, July
1990.
SPP 3/95, “Television Outside Broadcast (TOB) Service - 7.2 GHz and 8.3 GHz RF Channel
Arrangements”, July 1995.
SPP 4/95, “Frequency Dependent Rejection (FDR) Software”, May 1995.
SPP 4/96, “Interim Channel Arrangements for the 18 GHz Band - A Discussion Paper”, September
1996, and Addendum 1 to that paper, “New Interim Arrangements in the 18 GHz Band”.
SP 10/01, "Coordination Information for Defence Aeronautical Mobile Telemetry Systems Operating in
the 2200 to 2300 MHz Frequency Range".
SP 08/01, “Microwave fixed services: Survey of commercially manufactured (1.5-58 GHz) parabolic
antennas” June 2001
SP05/03, “Proposal for Spectrum Efficient Antenna Performance Regulatory Criteria for use in the
Fixed Service Microwave Bands”, June 2003
SP 04/04, “Spectrum Efficient Antenna Performance Regulatory Criteria Proposal - Summary and
Discussion of Responses”, April 2004

3
ITU DOCUMENTS
ITU Radio Regulations.
“ITU-R Handbook on Digital Radio-Relay Systems”, Geneva 1996.
“Economic and Technical Aspects of the Choice of Transmission Systems”, Appendix to Section B IV3
of the Handbook, ITU Geneva 1971.
ITU-R F-Series (Fixed Service) Recommendations
F.283-5 “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for low and medium capacity analogue or digital
radio-relay systems operating in the 2 GHz band”.
F.382-6 “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 2 and 4 GHz
bands”.
F.383-5 “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high capacity radio-relay systems operating in the
lower 6 GHz band”.
F.384-5 “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity analogue or high
capacity digital radio-relay systems operating in the upper 6 GHz band”.
F.385-6 “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 7 GHz
band”.
band”.
F.387-6 “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio relay systems operating in the 11 GHz
band”.
frequency band”.
frequency band”.
F.635-2 “Radio-frequency channel arrangements based on a homogeneous pattern for radio-relay

systems operating in the 4 GHz band”.
band”.
band”.
F.701 “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for analogue and digital point-to-multipoint radio
systems operating in frequency bands in the range 1.427 to 2.690 GHz (1.5, 1.8, 2.0, 2.2, 2.4 and 2.6
GHz)”.
F.746 “Radio-frequency Channel Arrangements for Radio-Relay Systems”.

4
F.747 “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 10 GHz band”.
band”.
F.752 “Diversity Techniques for Radio-Relay System”.
F.758 “Considerations in the development of criteria for sharing between the terrestrial fixed service
and other services”.
F.1099 “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high-capacity digital radio-relay systems in the
5 GHz (4400-5000 MHz) band”.
F.1093 “Effects of Multipath Propagation on the Design and Operation of Line-of-Sight Digital Radio-
Relay Systems”.
F.1095 “A procedure for determining coordination area between radio-relay stations of the fixed
service”.
F.1098-1, " Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in the 1 900 - 2
300 MHz Band".
F.1100 “Radio-Frequency Channel Arrangements for Radio-Relay Systems Operating in the 55 GHz
band”.
F.1247 “Technical and operational characteristics of systems in the Fixed Service to facilitate sharing
with the Space Research, Space Operation and Earth-Exploration Satellite Services operating in the
bands 2025-2110MHz and 2200-2290 MHz”.
F.1249 “Maximum Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power of transmitting stations in the Fixed
Service operating in the frequency band 25.25-27.5 GHz shared with the Inter-Satellite Service”.
ITU-R P-Series (Propagation) Recommendations
P.310-9 “Definitions of terms relating to propagation in non-ionised media”.
P.341-4 “The concept of Transmission Loss for Radio Links”.
P.452-7 “Prediction Procedure for the Evaluation of Microwave Interference between stations on the
Surface of the Earth at frequencies above about 0.7 GHz”.
P.453-5 “The Radio Refractive Index: its formula and Refractivity Data”.
P.526-4 “Propagation by diffraction”.
P.530-6 “ Propagation data and Prediction Methods required for the design of Terrestrial Line-of-
Sight Systems”.
P.581-2 “The concept of Worst Month”.
P.676 “Attenuation by atmospheric gases”.

5
P.834 “Effects of tropospheric refraction on radiowave propagation”.
P.837 “Characteristics of Precipitation for Propagation Modelling”.
P.838 “Specific Attenuation Model for Rain for use in Prediction Methods”.
P.841 “Conversion of annual statistics to worst-month statistics”.
ITU-R SF-Series (FS/FSS Frequency Sharing) Recommendations
SF.406 “Maximum Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power of Radio-Relay System Transmitters

Operating in the Frequency Bands Shared with the Fixed-satellite Service”.
SF.765 “Intersection of Radio-Relay Antenna beams with orbits used by Space Stations in the Fixed-
Satellite Service”.
SF.766 “Methods for determining the effects of interference on the performance and the availability of
terrestrial radio-relay systems and systems in the fixed-satellite service”.
SF.1004 “Maximum equivalent isotropically radiated power transmitted towards the horizon by earth
stations of the fixed satellite service sharing frequency bands with the fixed service”.
SF.1005 “Sharing between the fixed service and the fixed-satellite service with bidirectional usage in
bands above 10 GHz currently unidirectionally allocated”.
SF.1006 “Determination of the interference potential between earth stations of the fixed-satellite
service and stations in the fixed service”.
SF.1193 “Carrier-to-interference calculations between earth stations in the fixed-satellite service and
radio-relay systems”.
Other
“Spectrum Management Issues Relevant to Telecommunications”, Spectrum Management Agency,

August 1996.
“The Australian Geodetic Datum Technical Manual (National Mapping Council 1986)”.
Australian Standard AS 3516.2 “Siting of radiocommunications facilities - Part 2 Guidelines for fixed,
mobile and broadcasting facilities at frequencies above 30 MHz”.
“Frequency Coordination Procedures for Microwave Communication Services”, W. Yates and P.

Hilly, August 1990.
Part 101 “Fixed Microwave Services” of the FCC Rules, Pike & Fischers Communication Regulations.
“Catalogue of Software for Radio Spectrum Management”, ITU Radiocommunication Bureau, Geneva
1997.
“Analysing antenna performance in microwave radio interference environment”, E.S. Lensson,

A. Kerans, G. French, IEEE Asia Pacific Conference (Sydney 3-6 December 2000)

6
Useful Web Links
http://www.acma.gov.au Australian Communications and Media Authority.
http://www.ga.gov.au Geoscience Australia,

Department of Industry, Tourism and Resources.
http://www.itu.int International Telecommunication Union.
http://www.nsma.org National Spectrum Managers Association (USA).
http://www.fcc.gov Federal Communications Commission (USA).
http://www.ntia.doc.gov National Telecommunications and Information

Administration (USA).
http://www.ero.dk European Radiocommunications Office

i
APPENDIX 1: RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions
This appendix to the RALI FX 3 “Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Co-ordination” specifies
radio frequency channel arrangements and important assignment instructions for the fixed service
microwave frequency bands currently supported in Australia. The interpretation and application
of the information provided in this appendix is subject to the provisions of the relevant parts
(Parts 2, 3 and 4) of RALI FX 3. The arrangements are based mainly upon ITU-R
Recommendations and have been implemented by ACMA and it predecessors through a process
of progressive development over many years.
For ease of reference and in order to facilitate the ongoing maintenance of the document, the
arrangements are provided in a modular format for each band. Each individual band module
incorporates the applicable RF channel arrangements, assignment instructions and other band
specific coordination criteria in the form of antenna requirements, protection ratios and protection
ratio correction factors, as described in the coordination methodology detailed in Part 4 of this
RALI. Relevant ITU-R recommendations, complementary RALIs and other supporting
documents are also referenced. In each module, specific assignment instructions are provided for
the following assignment criteria :
• Typical Use;
• Assignment Priority;
• Minimum Path Length;
• Antenna Requirements; and
• Notes covering special arrangements, such as restrictions.
Every microwave fixed service assignment application should be routinely checked for
compliance against all relevant RALI specified assignment criteria. Detailed guidance regarding
the above assignment instructions and their application is provided in Part 3.1 of the RALI and
Appendix 6 "Application of Assignment Policy Rules". Where a specific assignment instruction
refers to another document, eg. another RALI or a Band Plan, then the user must take steps to
ensure that any resulting action also complies with the relevant provisions given in the referenced
document.
Any consistent anomalies resulting from the application of the assignment instructions or where
clarification of the scope and/or application of a specific assignment instruction is considered
necessary, policy advice should be sought from the Manager, Spectrum Engineering Section,
Spectrum Planning Branch, ACMA.
A short form summary of the currently supported Australian microwave fixed service bands is
provided in the following pages and is intended as a guide only. Specific information should be
checked against the relevant detailed frequency band module(s).
RALI FX 3 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions June 2023

ii
MICROWAVE FIXED SERVICE BANDS - TYPICAL UTILISATION PARAMETERS

Band Frequency Designated Use Typical Use Typical Min Channel RF
(GHz) Range (MHz) Capacity Path Width(s) Channel
Length (MHz) Arrangement
(km)
1.5 1427 - 1535 1 Low & Med. Radio Relay 2 Mbit/s 20 4 -
Capacity P-P
1.5 1427 - 1535 1 Fixed Radio Access Rural & Remote 0.7 – 2 - 2 ITU-R
DRCS area (USO) services Mbit/s Rec. F.701
1.8 1700 - 1900 3 Low & Med. Radio Relay 8/17 Mbit/s 20 14 ITU-R
Capacity P-P Rec. F.283-5
1.8 1710 - 18802 Spectrum Licensed Band5
(typically GSM/GPRS Mobile services)
2.1 1900 – 21702 Spectrum Licensed Band5
(typically 3G Mobile services)
2.1 1900 - 2300 2 Low & Med. Radio Relay, FM 34 Mbit/s 20 29 ITU-R
Capacity P-P Video Rec. F.382-6
2.2 2025 - 22852,3 Medium Capacity Radio Relay 34 Mbit/s 20 14 ITU-R
P-P Rec. F.1098-1
2.3 2302 - 2400 2 Spectrum Licensed Band
(typically FWA subscriber-access services)
2.5 2500 - 26902 Spectrum Licensed Band
3.4 3400 - 3700 Spectrum Licensed Band
3.8 3580 – 42004 High Capacity Long Haul 140/155 20 40 ITU-R

(Intercapital) Radio Mbit/s Rec. F.635-2
Relay
5 4400 - 5000 Defence Use
6 5925 - 6425 Med. & High Medium Haul 34/197 20 29.65/ ITU-R
Capacity P-P Radio Relay Mbit/s 59.3 Rec. F.383-5
6.7 6425 - 7110 High Capacity Long Haul 140/155/298 20 40/80 ITU-R
(Intercapital) Radio Mbit/s Rec. F.384-5
Relay
7.2 7100 - 7425 Television Outside Itinerant use TOB FM Video - 8 -
Broadcast (TOB) video links
7.5 7425 - 7725 Low & Med. Medium Haul 2 – 17 20 14/7/3.5/ ITU-R
8 7725 - 8275 Med. & High Medium Haul 34/197 10 29.65/ ITU-R
8.3 8275 - 8400 TOB Itinerant use TOB FM Video - 28 -
video links
10 10.55 - 10.68 Low & Med. Urban Networks 2-34 Mbit/s 5 14/7 ITU-R
Capacity P-P & FM Video Rec. F.747
11 10.7 - 11.7 High Capacity Medium Haul 155/298 5 40/80 ITU-R
Radio Relay & Mbit/s Rec. F.387-6
Urban Networks
(...continued on following page)
RALI FX 3 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions June 2023

iii
Microwave Fixed Service Bands - Typical Utilisation Parameters (...continued from previous page)
Band Frequency Designated Use Typical Use Typical Min Channel RF

(GHz) Range (GHz) Capacity Path Width(s) Channel
Length (MHz) Arrangement
(km)
13 12.75 - 13.25 Med. Capacity P-P Video links in FM Video & - 28 ITU-R
& TOB urban areas 34/68 Mbit/s Rec. F.497-4
15 14.5 - 15.35 Low & Med. Urban Networks 2-68 Mbit/s 5 28/14/7 ITU-R
Capacity P-P Rec. F.636-3
18 17.7 - 19.7 2 Low to High Urban Networks 2-155 Mbit/s 2 55/27.5/ ITU-R
Capacity P-P 13.75/7.5 Rec. F.595-4
22 21.2 - 23.6 Low & Med. Urban networks & 2-34 Mbit/s, - 56/50/28/ ITU-R
Capacity P-P & itinerant TOB video FM video 14/7 Rec. F.637-2
TOB links
27 26.5 – 27.52 Spectrum Licensed Band5
(typically FWA/LMDS services)
28 27.5 – 29.5 High Capacity P-P Urban & MTS 155-310 - 28/56/ ITU-R
backhaul Mbit/s 112 Rec. F.749-1
38 37 - 39.5 Low & Med. Urban & MTS 2-34 Mbit/s - 28/14/7 ITU-R
Capacity P-P backhaul Rec. F.749-1
49 49.2 - 49.95 Itinerant P-P Temporary Links - - 40 -
50 50.4 - 51.15 Low Capacity P-P Urban Networks - - 40
1. Use of the 1.5 GHz (1427-1535 MHz) band is subject to the provisions of the “1.5GHz Band Plan”, December
1996.
2. These bands are subject to a spectrum embargo, as specified in RALI MS 3 “Spectrum Embargoes”.
3. Only parts of the 1.8, 2.1 and 2.2 GHz bands are available for use by apparatus licensed microwave fixed services
due to spectrum licensing in the band. Refer to the relevant Assignment Restrictions for the affected frequency
ranges and areas. Methods for coordination with the spectrum licensed bands and areas are set out in the 1.8, 2.1
and 2.2 GHz Channel Arrangements, Assignment Instructions and Assignment restrictions and also Appendix 7.
4. ITU-R Rec. F.635-2 specifies the channel arrangement for this band, but channels 1-6 are no longer available for
assignment. Refer to the 3.8 band details in Appendix 1.
RALI FX 3 - Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions June 2023

THE 1.5 GHz BAND (1427-1535 MHz)
RF CHANNEL ARRANGEMENTS
1452 1492 1525 1535

fo
1427 1481 1535
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
91
95
99
03
07
11
15
19
23
27
31
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
46
54
58
62
66
70
30
34
38
42
50
14
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10' 11'
4 MHz
60.5 MHz
MAIN
fo
1427 1481 1535
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
.5
93
97
01
05
09
13
17
21
25
29
33
32
36
40
44
48
52
56
60
64
68
72
14
14
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
15
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
14
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10' 11'
4 MHz
60.5 MHz
INTERLEAVED
DSB Allocation MSS Allocation
No new assignments No new assignments
ASSIGNMENT INSTRUCTIONS
This band is designated for use by low capacity fixed point-to-point links.
Typical Use : 2 Mbit/s data
Assignment Priority : not specified, See Note 1.
Minimum Path Length : 20 km
Antenna Requirements : refer to Appendix 11
Notes:
1. The use of this band is subject to the provisions of Reference 1, constraining the availability
of some channels for new fixed services.
2. The spectrum 1427 to 1535 MHz is also used by 1.5 GHz DRCS services in rural and remote
areas.
3. All assignments that have emissions in the 1452 – 1492 or 1518-1535 MHz ranges shall be
endorsed with Advisory Note BL that states “This frequency band is currently under review to
accommodate changes in technology. This review may lead to a requirement to change
frequency or cease transmissions”.
[1.5 GHz - Page 1 of 4]
FX 3 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions April 2005

Reference
1. The “1.5 GHz Band Plan”, December 1996.
[1.5 GHz - Page 2 of 4]
FX 3 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions August 1998

PROTECTION RATIOS
1. Protection ratios required between digital systems operating on 2 and 4 MHz channels.
Frequency Offset PROTECTION RATIO (dB)

(MHz) Digital Interferer Tx → Digital Victim Rx
2 MHz→ 2 MHz → 4 MHz → 4 MHz →
2 MHz 4 MHz 2 MHz 4 MHz
0 60 60 60 60
2 30 55 47 55
4 27 20 30
6 8
2. Protection ratios required by digital systems operating on 2 and 4 MHz channels against
interference from analogue systems operating on 2 and 4 MHz channels.

(MHz) Analogue Interferer Tx → Digital Victim Rx
0 60 60 60 60
2 30 30 60
4 20
3. Protection ratios required by analogue systems operating on 2 and 4 MHz channels against
interference from digital systems operating on 2 and 4 MHz channels.

(MHz) Digital Interferer Tx → Analogue Victim Rx
0 60 60 60 60
2 10 10 10 30
Notes:
1. Protection ratio for digital systems are based on a 60 km path length and PL (Percentage of
time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than
or equal to -100 N units/km) of 20. For other path lengths and PL values refer to the
appropriate protection ratio correction factors graph on the following page.
[1.5 GHz - Page 3 of 4]

PROTECTION RATIO CORRECTION FACTORS
MULTI PATH
10
-5
Correction Factor (dB)
-10
-15
-20
PL=5
PL=10
PL=20
-25
-30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Path Length (km)
PL: Percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than or
equal to -100 N units/km.
For further details refer to Annex A to Appendix 1.
[1.5 GHz - Page 4 of 4]
FX 3 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions October 1999

THE 1.5 GHz DRCS BAND (1427-1535 MHz)
(Point-to-Multipoint Services)
1452 1492 1525 1535
fo
1427 1481 1535
1467.5
1439.5
1431.5
1433.5
1435.5
1437.5
1441.5
1443.5
1445.5
1447.5
1449.5
1451.5
1453.5
1455.5
1457.5
1459.5
1461.5
1463.5
1465.5
1469.5
1471.5
1473.5
1528
1500
1524
1526
1530
1532
1534
1494
1496
1498
1502
1504
1506
1508
1510
1512
1514
1516
1518
1520
1522
1492
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2 MHz
60.5 MHz
DSB Allocation. See Note 2. MSS Allocation. See Note 2.
This band is designated for use by point-to-point and point-to-multipoint fixed links
used for the delivery of public telecommunications services in rural and remote areas
(see Reference 1).
Typical Use : Digital Radio Concentrator Systems (DRCS).

Assignment Priority : See Notes 2b and 3a
Minimum Path Length : not applicable
Antenna Requirements : not specified
Note:
1. The use of these arrangements is restricted to rural and remote areas.
2a. Assignments for DRCS systems (or upgrades to DRCS systems) may not be made
in parts of Australia that are less than 200 km from the GPOs any of the following
locations: Sydney, Melbourne, Brisbane, Adelaide, Perth, Hobart, Canberra,
Albury, Horsham and Port Macquarie.
2b. Channel assignment restrictions apply. No further point-to-multipoint
assignments may be made on channels 20/20’, 21/21’ or 22/22’ and new point-to-
multipoint assignments on channels 11 to 19 and channel 1’, 18’ and 19’ are
restricted to cases where interference considerations preclude the use of other
channels in the band. In such cases an “assign lowest channel first” rule applies.
2c. All assignments that have emissions in the 1452 – 1492 or 1518-1535 MHz
ranges shall be endorsed with Advisory Note BL that states: “This frequency band
is currently under review to accommodate changes in technology. This review
may lead to a requirement to change frequency or cease transmissions”.
3a. Assignments for broadband wireless access (BWA) systems may in some
circumstances be made in parts of this band. Assignments for BWA services may
[1.5 GHz DRCS Page 1 of 4]

not be made in high or medium density areas (see Schedule 1 of Reference 3).
Assignments for BWA systems may only be made on channels 2/2’ to 10/10’ and,
pending the future revision of Reference 1, shall be subject to case-by-case
consideration by the Manager, Spectrum Planning and Engineering.
3b. Assignments for broadband wireless access (BWA) systems shall be endorsed
with the following Special Condition and Advisory Note:
Special Condition:
“The transmitting equipment authorised by this licence shall employ automatic
transmit power control (ATPC).”
Advisory Note
“Note:
(a) remote station receivers will be afforded protection from harmful
interference only from services provided that they: operate within 15 km
of their associated base station; have an antenna with a height above sea
level no greater than that of their associated base station antenna; and,
have an antenna gain no greater than 11 dBi.
(b) remote station transmitters must not cause interference to other services
beyond the levels that would be caused if they: were located within 15 km
of their associated base station; have an antenna with a height above sea
level no greater than that of their associated base station antenna;
operate with a transmitter power of no more than 30 dBm; and, have an
antenna gain no greater than 11 dBi”.
References
1. The “1.5 GHz Band Plan”, December 1996.
2. Rec. ITU-R F.701, “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for analogue and

digital
point-to-multipoint radio systems operating in frequency bands in the range 1.427 to
. 2.690 GHz (1.5, 1.8, 2.0, 2.2, 2.4 and 2.6 GHz)”.
3. Radiocommunications (Transmitter Licence Tax) Determination 2003 No.2

PROTECTION RATIOS

MHz Digital Interferer Tx → Digital Victim Rx
2→2 2→4 4→2 4→4
MHz MHz MHz MHz
0 60 60 60 60
2 30 55 47 55
4 27 20 30
6 8
2. Protection ratios required by digital systems operating on 2 and 4 MHz channels against
interference from analogue systems operating on 2 and 4 MHz channels.

MHz Analogue Interferer Tx → Digital Victim Rx
2→2 2→4 4→2 4→4
MHz MHz MHz MHz
0 60 60 60 60
2 30 30 60
4 20
3. Protection ratios required by analogue systems operating on 2 and 4 MHz channels against
interference from digital systems operating on 2 and 4 MHz channels.

MHz Digital Interferer Tx → Analogue Victim Rx
2→2 2→4 4→2 4→4
MHz MHz MHz MHz
0 60 60 60 60
2 10 10 10 30
Note: Protection ratio for digital systems are based on a 60 km path length and PL=20. For other
path lengths and PL values refer to the appropriate protection ratio correction factors graph on the
following page.

MULTIPATH
10
-5
-10
-15
-20
PL=5
PL=10
PL=20
-25
-30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Path Length (km)
PL: Percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than or equal to
-100 N units/km.

THE 1.8 GHz BAND (1700 - 1900 MHz)
fo
1700 1808 1900
1710 1725 1785 1805 1820 1880
1 2 3 4 5 6 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6'
14 MHz
119 MHz
MAIN
fo
1700 1808 1900
1 2 3 4 5 6 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6'
14 MHz
119 MHz
INTERLEAVED
fo
1700 1808 1900
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10' 11' 12' 13'
7 MHz
119 MHz
7 MHz CHANNELS
fo
1700 1808 1900
1 1'
10 MHz 95 MHz
10 MHz CHANNELS
PCS Spectrum licensed PCS Spectrum Cordless Band. 3G Spectrum licensed
bands in major city areas licensed bands in No additional point-to-point bands in Capital City
and regional areas major city areas only fixed services Australia-wide areas only
This band is designated for use by low and medium capacity fixed point-to-point links.
Typical Use : 8/17 Mbit/s data
Assignment Priority : not specified
[1.8 GHz - Page 1 of 9]
FX 3 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions June 2016

THE 1.8 GHz BAND (1700 - 1900 MHz)
Notes:
1. Some channels are not available for assignment (Assignment Restrictions 1).
2. Proposed fixed link assignments must be coordinated with spectrum licences operating in
1800 MHz (1710-1785 MHz and 1805-1880 MHz) and 2 GHz (1900-1980 MHz) bands
(Assignment Restrictions 2 and ref. 5).
3. Note potential for interference to/from fixed services operating in the upper channels of the
1.8 GHz band to/from adjacent 2.1 GHz band fixed services.
4. Note potential for interference to adjacent Met-Sat services near 1.7 GHz from channel 1
of the 14 MHz channel main raster and channels 1 and 2 of the 7 MHz channel raster.
5. DELETED
6. New and existing apparatus licensed assignments in all areas and with emissions in the
frequency range 1710 -1880 MHz shall be endorsed with Advisory Note BL.
7. DELETED
8. New apparatus licensed assignments in spectrum license space and with emissions in the
frequency ranges 1710-1785 MHz and 1805-1880 MHz are embargoed (ref. 5).
9. Prospective new apparatus licensed assignments within specified zones around specified
radio astronomy facilities and with emission bandwidths in the frequency range
1250-1780 MHz must be notified to CSIRO (ref. 12).
10. The 7 MHz channel raster is to support migration of existing assignments with an emission
bandwidth of 7 MHz or less from the 14 MHz raster. No new services are to be assigned
on the 7 MHz raster.
11. The 10 MHz channels have been defined to support the migration of existing assignments
with an emission bandwidth of 10 MHz or less from the 14 MHz channel raster. No new
services are to be assigned on the 10 MHz channels. The ACMA intends to review these
arrangements before 2019. This review will include consideration of the appropriate long
term arrangements and whether new fixed links could be facilitated.
12. All assignments on the 10 MHz channels shall be endorsed with Special Condition C15
and Advisory Note C16 (see Assignment Restriction 6).
References:
1. Rec. ITU-R F.283-5, "Radio-frequency channel arrangements for low and medium
capacity analogue or digital radio-relay systems operating in the 2 GHz band".
2. 1.9 GHz Spectrum Arrangements (1880 - 1900 MHz)
3. DELETED
4. DELETED
5. RALI MS 3, "Spectrum Embargoes", Embargo 26.
6. DELETED
7. DELETED
8. DELETED
9. DELETED
10. DELETED
11. DELETED
12. RALI MS 31, "Notification Zones for Apparatus Licensed Services around Radio
Astronomy Facilities".
13. The “1900-1920 MHz Frequency Band Plan 2012”, 26 March 2012
[1.8 GHz - Page 2 of 9]

THE 1.8 GHz BAND (1700 - 1900 MHz)
Assignment restrictions:
1. Channels that may NOT be assigned.
1.1 1785-1805 MHz & 1880-1900 MHz In these frequency ranges, no new assignments can be
made on any channels that overlap this frequency range (ref .2). However, in line with note 11,
existing services can be migrated to the a 10 MHz channel arrangements provided no
assignments are made within the Areas of high mobile use as defined in Schedule 4 of the
Radiocommunications (Unacceptable Levels of Interference – 1800 MHz Band) Determination
2012
1.2 Spectrum Licences Apparatus licensing is not permitted in those frequencies and areas
subject to spectrum licensing, refer RALI MS 3 Embargo 26 (ref. 5). Therefore, no new
assignments are to be made in certain areas in the 1800 MHz bands (1710 to 1785 MHz and
1805 to 1880 MHz) and the 2 GHz band (1900 to 1980 MHz) due to spectrum licensing (refs. 5).
1.3 Affected Channels See Tables 1 and 2 for details on affected channels.
2. Coordination requirements with 1800 MHz and 2 GHz band spectrum licenses.
Proposed fixed link assignments must be coordinated with spectrum licences operating in the
1800 MHz (1710 - 1785 MHz and 1805 - 1880 MHz) and 2 GHz (1900 - 1980 MHz) bands in
accordance with Appendix 7 of this RALI. Proposed fixed link assignments planned for co-
channel operation with respect to spectrum licences in areas adjacent to spectrum licensed areas
must be coordinated with spectrum licences if they are within a threshold distance of 200 km of
the spectrum licence boundary. Proposed fixed link assignments planned for adjacent channel
operation with respect to spectrum licences inside or adjacent to spectrum licence boundaries
must also be coordinated. Tables 1 and 2 detail the affected channels.
Note: The terms ‘remote, ‘regional’ and ‘major city’ are used to describe areas in the context of 1.8 GHz band
spectrum licensing. ‘Major city’ and ‘regional areas’ are those areas that have been re-allocated or designated for
spectrum licensing. All other areas are defined as ‘remote’ areas.
3. Coordination requirements with CTS.
The operation of private CTS devices in the 1.9 GHz band are authorised by the
Radiocommunications (Cordless Telecommunications Devices) Class Licence 2014. Under the
class licensing arrangements, CTS devices are not coordinated with other services, as such,
existing fixed services in this band are not protected from CTS transmitter interference.
4. Coordination with existing fixed link assignments.
In addition to the coordination requirements stated above, proposed new assignments must be
coordinated with existing fixed link assignments in accordance with normal FX-3 assignment
procedures.
[1.8 GHz - Page 3 of 9]

THE 1.8 GHz BAND (1700 - 1900 MHz)
5. Channels available for assignment.
See Tables 1 and 2 for channels available for assignment.
6. Special condition and Advisory Note for assignments using the 10 MHz channel
arrangements
To manage interference into devices operating under an 1800 MHz band spectrum licence, all
assignments shall be endorsed with Special Condition C15.
Special Condition C15:

If necessary to facilitate coordination with other services (irrespective of which licence
was issued first-in-time), the licensee shall reduce the radiated unwanted emissions of
each station authorised by this licence so they do not exceed the levels defined in
Schedule 3 of the Radiocommunications Advisory Guidelines (Managing Interference to
Spectrum Licensed Receivers – 1800 MHz Band) 2012
1800 MHz band spectrum licensees are not expected to coordinate the operation of transmitters
that are exempt from registration (e.g. mobile devices and femtocells) and operating in the 1710-
1785 MHz band with fixed links operating on the 10 MHz channel arrangements. Consequently,
any such apparatus licensed fixed services are not protected from interference caused by these
devices. Advisory Note C16 must be attached to all fixed service licences issued on the 10 MHz
channel arrangements to ensure licensees are aware of this.
Advisory Note C16:

Radiocommunications receivers authorised to operate under this licence are not
protected from interference caused by radiocommunications transmitters operating
under a spectrum licence in the 1710-1785 MHz frequency range.
[1.8 GHz - Page 4 of 9]

THE 1.8 GHz BAND (1700 - 1900 MHz)
Table 1: Channel Arrangements (Lower Channel Set) - Channel Availability and Restrictions
and Inter-Service Coordination.
Channel Channel Channel Centre Channel Availability and Restrictions Inter-Service

Number Number Number (MHz) Coordination
(14 MHz) (7 MHz) (10 MHz)
1.8 GHz Major City 1.8 GHz Regional Areas* 1.8 GHz Remote
Areas* Areas*
Adelaide, Brisbane, Canberra, Darwin Area A - Eastern All Other Areas
Melbourne, Perth, and Hobart Region and Area B
and Sydney Western Region
1M 1M 1713.5
1I 2M 1720.5
2M 3M 1727.5
2I 4M 1734.5
3M 5M 1741.5 Not Available (ref. 5)
3I 6M 1748.5
4M 7M 1755.5 1.8 GHz Spectrum
4I 8M 1762.5 Licences
5M 9M 1769.5 (within 200 km of a
5I 10M 1776.5 Spectrum Licence
6M 11M 1783.5 boundary).
6I 12M 1790.5 Not Available (Assignment restriction 1.1)
13M 1797.5
1M 1800 Only available for migration of existing services in 14 MHz channels to 10 MHz channels
(Notes 11, Assignment Restrictions 1.1 & 6).
* See ref. 5 for definition of these areas.
## Note: if BW > 11MHz coordination with major city spectrum licences will be required if proposed station is within 200km of the major city spectrum licence boundary.
[1.8 GHz - Page 5 of 9]

THE 1.8 GHz BAND (1700 - 1900 MHz)
Table 2: Channel Arrangements (Upper Channel Set) - Channel Availability and Restrictions
and Inter-Service Coordination.
Channel Channel Channel Centre Channel Availability and Restrictions Inter-Service
Number Number Number (MHz) Coordination
(14 MHz) (7 MHz) (10 MHz)
1.8 GHz/2 GHz 1.8 GHz/ 2GHz Regional Areas* 1.8 GHz/ 2GHz
Major City Areas* Remote Areas*
Adelaide, Brisbane, Canberra, Darwin Area A - Eastern All Other Areas
Melbourne, Perth, and Hobart** Region and Area B
and Sydney* Western Region***
1M' 1M' 1832.5
1I' 2M' 1839.5 1.8 GHz Spectrum
2M' 3M' 1846.5 Licences
2I' 4M' 1853.5 Not Available (ref. 5)
(within 200 km of a
3M' 5M' 1860.5 Spectrum Licence
3I' 6M' 1867.5 boundary).
4M' 7M' 1874.5 BW < 11 MHz (Assignment
Restrictions 1.1)
4I' 8M' 1881.5
5M' 9M' 1888.5 Not Available
Not Available (Assignment Restriction 1.1)
1M’ 1895
(Assignment Restriction 1.1)
5I' 10M' 1895.5 Only available for migration of existing services in 14 MHz channels
to 10 MHz channels (Notes 11, Assignment Restrictions 1.1 & 6).
6M' 11M' 1902.5 BW<5 MHz (Assignment Restrictions 1.1) 2GHz Spectrum
6I' 12M' 1909.5 Licences
13M' 1916.5 Not Available (ref. 5) (refs. 5 & 13) (within 200 km of a
Spectrum Licence
boundary).
* See refs. 5 for definition of these areas.
** See refs. 5 for definition of 2 GHz Spectrum Licensed areas. Note: Canberra, Darwin and Hobart form part of the capital city areas for 2 GHz Spectrum Licenses.
*** Note: some 2 GHz Spectrum Licence Areas differ to 1.8 GHz Spectrum License areas.
[1.8 GHz - Page 6 of 9]

THE 1.8 GHz BAND (1700 - 1900 MHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
1. Protection ratios required between digital systems.

7 MHz→ 7 MHz → 14 MHz → 14 MHz →
0 60 60 60 60
7 30 45 50 53
14 36 27 30
21 6 20
2. Protection ratios required between digital and analogue systems.

(MHz) Analogue Interferer Tx Digital Interferer Tx
↓ ↓
Digital Victim Rx Analogue Victim Rx
7 MHz → 14 MHz → 7 MHz → 14 MHz →
0 60 60 60 60
7 30 50 30 50
14 20 20
3. Protection ratios required between analogue systems.

(MHz) Analogue Interferer Tx → Analogue Victim Rx
14 MHz → 14 MHz
0 60
7 50
14 10
4. Protection ratios required for receivers operating in the 10 MHz channel arrangements.
PROTECTION RATIO (dB)

Frequency Offset*
Any Interferer Tx → 10 MHz Victim Rx
Co-channel 60
1st Adjacent
30
Channel
nd
2 Adjacent
-**
Channel
[1.8 GHz - Page 7 of 9]

THE 1.8 GHz BAND (1700 - 1900 MHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
* In the above table adjacent channels are defined as the maximum of the
interfering transmitter and victim receivers channel size. For example, in the case
of an interference assessment for a point-to-point transmitter operating in a 14
MHz channel into a point-to-point receiver operating in a 10 MHz channel, the
first adjacent channel refers to the 14 MHz channel either side of the victim
receiver’s licensed channel.
** Receivers operating in the 10 MHz channelling arrangements are only provided
protection to the first adjacent channel.
5. Protection ratios required from transmitters operating in the 10 MHz channel

arrangements.
PROTECTION RATIO (dB)

Frequency Offset*
10 MHz Interferer Tx → Victim Rx
Co-channel 60
1st Adjacent
30
Channel
2nd Adjacent
0
Channel
* In the above table adjacent channels are defined as the maximum of the
interfering transmitter and victim receivers channel size. For example, in the case
of an interference assessment for a point-to-point transmitter operating in a 10
MHz channel into a point-to-point receiver operating in a 14 MHz channel, the
first adjacent channel refers to the 14 MHz channel either side of the victim
receiver’s licensed channel. The same logic is used to determine the 2nd adjacent
channels.
Notes:
1. Protection ratios are based on a 60 km path length and PL (Percentage of time that the average
refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than or equal to -100 N
units/km) of 20. For other path lengths and PL values refer to the appropriate protection ratio
correction factors graph on the following page.
[1.8 GHz - Page 8 of 9]

THE 1.8 GHz BAND (1700 - 1900 MHz)

MULTI PATH
10
-5
-10
-15
-20
PL=5
PL=10
PL=20
-25
-30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Path Length (km)
[1.8 GHz - Page 9 of 9]
FX 3 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions

fo
2302
2100
1900 2110 2170 2200 2300
2025
1980 2010
1922 1951 1980 2009 2038 2067 2135 2164 2193 2222 2251 2280
1 2 3 4 5 6 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6'
29 MHz
213 MHz
MAIN
fo
1900 2100 2300
1907.5 1936.5 1965.5 1994.5 2023.5 2052.5 2120.5 2149.5 2178.5 2207.5 2236.5 2265.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6'
29 MHz
213 MHz
INTERLEAVED
Shared cordless band. Mobile satellite service band.

No new point-to-point No new fixed services
links Australia-wide Australia-wide
3G Spectrum Licensed Band. 2.2 GHz Band fixed service spectrum. 2.3 GHz Spectrum Licensed Band.
No new fixed services No new fixed service assignments
City and Regional under these channel
arrangements permitted
No new assignments are to be made Australia-wide in bands 1980-2010 MHz and 2170-2200 MHz. No
new assignments are to be made in channels overlapping the 2.2 GHz channel plan. No new
assignments in the bands 2010-2110 MHz and 2200-2300 MHz in the areas identified in Embargo 23 as
shown in Figure 2 and 3. Additionally no assignments are to be made in the bands 1900-1980 MHz and
2110-2170 MHz in the areas described in Embargo 26. This band is otherwise designated for use by
medium capacity fixed point-to-point links.
Typical Use : 34 Mb/s data, FM video
Notes:
[2.1 GHz - Page 1 of 22]

1. Some channels are not available for assignment (Assignment Restrictions 1 and refs. 2, 3, 9, and
10).
2. Proposed fixed link assignments must be coordinated with spectrum licences operating in 3G
bands (Assignment Restrictions 2 and ref. 10).
3. Proposed fixed link assignments must be coordinated with spectrum licences operating in the 2.3
GHz band (Assignment Restrictions 3 and ref. 6).
4. Proposed fixed link assignments must be coordinated with earth stations operating in this band
5. Note potential for interference to channel 1 to and from adjacent 1.8 GHz band fixed services.
6. New and existing apparatus licensed assignments in all areas and with emissions in the frequency
ranges 1920-1960 MHz and 2110-2150 MHz shall be endorsed with Advisory Note BL (ref. 11).
7. New fixed (and mobile) assignments Australia wide and with emissions in the frequency ranges
1980-2010 MHz or 2170-2200 MHz are embargoed. New Fixed (and mobile) assignments in the
frequency ranges 2010-2110 MHz and 2200-2300 MHz are embargoed for specific areas identified
in Attachment 1 of Embargo 23, (ref. 3)
8. DELETED
9. DELETED
10. New apparatus licensed assignments in certain spectrum licensed areas and with emissions in the
frequency ranges 1900-1980 MHz and 2110-2170 MHz are embargoed (ref. 10).
11. DELETED
12. DELETED
13. DELETED
14. Prospective new apparatus licensed assignments within specified zones around specified radio
astronomy facilities and with emission bandwidths in the frequency range 2200-2550 MHz must
be notified to CSIRO (ref. 15).
15. Proposed fixed links must be coordinated with fixed TOB collection stations (ref.16).
16. No new assignments within 100km of the Radio Quiet Zone in the bands 1900-2300 MHz (ref. 17).
17. No new assignments within 300km of Mingenew in the bands 2100-2130 MHz and 2280-2310
MHz otherwise 150km for assignments below 12 GHz (ref. 18).
References:
1. Rec. ITU-R F.382-6, "Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in
the 2 and 4 GHz bands".
[2.1 GHz - Page 2 of 22]

2. The "1.9 GHz Band Plan", 14 March 1996.
3. RALI MS 3, "Spectrum Embargoes", Embargo No. 23.
4. DELETED
5. DELETED
6. "Radiocommunications (Spectrum Designation) Notice No.1 of 2000 [January 2000]".
7. RALI MS 26, "Coordination of Microwave Fixed Services with Earth Stations".
8. Spectrum Planning Report 2001/10, "Coordination Information for Defence Aeronautical Mobile
Telemetry Systems Operating in the 2200 to 2300 MHz Frequency Range".
9. "Radiocommunications (Spectrum Re-allocation) Declaration No. 1 of 2005", 4 April 2005.
11. Spectrum Planning Discussion Paper 2006/01, "Strategies for Wireless Access Services".
12. RALI FX 19, "Frequency Coordination and Licensing Procedures for Apparatus Licensed Broadband
Wireless Access Services in the 1900-1920 and 2010-2025 MHz Bands".
13. DELETED
14. DELETED.
15. RALI MS 31, "Notification Zones for Apparatus Licensed Services around Radio Astronomy
Facilities".
16. RALI FX 21 “Television Outside Broadcasting Services in the bands 1980-2110 MHz and 2170-2300
MHz”.
[2.1 GHz - Page 3 of 22]

THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)
ASSIGNMENT RESTRICTIONS
1. Channels that may NOT be assigned
1.1 1.9 GHz Band Plan Provisions of the 1.9 GHz Band Plan (ref. 2) which introduced the cordless
telecommunications service in the band 1880-1900 MHz do not permit additional (new or re-tuned)
fixed stations in this band. This affects channel 1I (1907.5 MHz).
1.2 Spectrum Licences No new assignments are to be made in certain areas in the 3G bands (1900 to
1980 MHz and 2110 to 2170 MHz) due to spectrum licensing (ref. 10).
1.3 Embargo 23 RALI MS 3, Embargo 23 (ref. 3) requires that no new assignments are to be made
Australia-wide in bands 1980-2010 MHz and 2170-2200 MHz. No new assignments in frequency ranges
that overlaps with the 2.2 GHz band channel arrangements. No new assignments are to be made in the
bands 2010-2110 MHz and 2200-2300 MHz in the areas identified in Embargo 23 and show in Figure 2
and 3.
1.4 Affected Channels See Tables 1 and 2 for details on affected channels.
1.5 Embargo 41 RALI MS 3, No new assignments within 100km of the Radio Quiet Zone in the bands
1900-2300 MHz (ref. 17).
1.6 Embargo 49 RALI MS 3, No new assignments within 300km of Mingenew in the bands 2100-2130
MHz and 2280-2310 MHz otherwise no new assignments within 150km of Mingenew for channels
below 12 GHz (ref. 18).
2. Coordination requirements with 3G spectrum licences
Proposed fixed link assignments must be coordinated with spectrum licences operating in the 3G bands
(1900 to 1980 MHz and 2110 to 2170 MHz) in accordance with Appendix 7 of this RALI. Proposed fixed
link assignments planned for co-channel operation with respect to spectrum licences in areas adjacent
to spectrum licensed areas must be coordination with spectrum licences if they are within a threshold
distance of 200 km of the spectrum licence boundary. Proposed fixed link assignments planned for
adjacent channel operation with respect to spectrum licences inside or adjacent to spectrum licence
boundaries must also be coordinated. The map at Figure 1 illustrates the geographic boundaries and
[2.1 GHz - Page 4 of 22]

coordination threshold contours for these coordination requirements. Tables 1 and 2 detail the affected
channels.
3. Coordination requirements with spectrum licences operating in the 2.3 GHz band
Proposed fixed link assignments with receivers planned for operation in the 2256 to 2300 MHz
frequency range or transmitters planned for operation in the 2266 to 2300 MHz frequency range must
to be coordinated with spectrum licences operating in the 2.3 GHz spectrum licensed band (2302 to
2400 MHz) (see ref.6).
See Tables 1 and 2 for channels that are subject to coordination as outlined above.
[2.1 GHz - Page 5 of 22]

THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)
4. Coordination requirements with earth stations
Proposed fixed link assignments must be coordinated with earth stations operating in the 2025 to 2120
MHz and 2200 to 2300 MHz bands. Coordination must be in accordance with the requirements of RALI
MS 26 (ref. 7).
See Tables 1 and 2 for channels that are subject to coordination as outlined above.
5. Coordination with existing fixed link assignments
coordinated with existing fixed link assignments in this band and the 2.2 GHz band in accordance
with normal FX-3 assignment procedures.
6. Channels available for assignment
See Tables 1 and 2 for channels available for assignment.
7. Coordination with licenced Television Outside Broadcasting (TOB) receivers
Proposed fixed link assignments in the frequency range 2010-2110 MHz and 2200-2300 MHz must be
coordinated with existing licensed TOB receivers (collection stations) using the method and parameters
outlined in RALI FX 21 (ref. 16).
[2.1 GHz - Page 6 of 22]

THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)
Table 1: Channel Arrangements (Lower Channel Set) - Channel Availability and Restrictions
and Inter-Service Coordination
Channel Centre Channel Availability and Restrictions Inter-Service Coordination

Number (MHz)
Adelaide, Brisbane, Canberra* Area A - Eastern All Other Areas

Darwin, Hobart, Region and Area B
Melbourne, Perth, and Western Region*
Sydney*
1I 1907.5 Not Available (ref.2 and ref. 7)
1M 1922 Not Available (ref. 7) BW < 4 MHz (ref. 7)
2I 1936.5 Not Available (ref. 7)
2M 1951 Not Available (ref. 7) BW < 18 MHz (ref. 7) 3 G Spectrum Licences
3I 1965.5 Not Available (ref. 7)
3M 1980
Not Available
4I 1994.5
Refer to Embargo 23 (ref. 3)
4M 2009
5I 2023.5 Not Available, 2.2 GHz channel plan and Embargo 23 (ref. 3) TOB licensed receivers
[2.1 GHz - Page 7 of 22]

5M 2038
6I 2052.5
6M 2067
* See ref. 7 for definition of these areas and the map at Figure 1
[2.1 GHz - Page 8 of 22]

THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)
Table 2: Channel Arrangements (Upper Channel Set) - Channel Availability and Restrictions
and Inter-Service Coordination
Channel Centre Channel Availability and Restrictions Inter-Service Coordination

Number (MHz)
Adelaide, Brisbane, Canberra* Area A - Eastern All Other Areas

Darwin, Hobart, Region and Area B
Melbourne, Perth, and Western Region*
Sydney*
1I' 2120.5 3G Spectrum Licences
BW < 21 MHz (ref. 3 BW > 1 MHz - Earth Stations

Not Available (ref. 7) BW < 9 MHz (ref. 7) (embargo))
BW > 21 MHz - Geostationary Satellite Orbit
Avoidance
1M' 2135 Not Available (ref. 7)

3G Spectrum Licences
2I' 2149.5 Not Available (ref. 7) BW < 1 MHz (ref. 7)
2M' 2164 BW < 12 MHz (ref. 3

Not Available (ref. 7) 3G Spectrum Licences
(embargo))
3I' 2178.5 TOB licensed receiver
[2.1 GHz - Page 9 of 22]

3M' 2193 Not Available Earth Stations
4I' 2207.5 2.2 GHz channel plan and embargo 23 (ref. 3)
4M' 2222
5I' 2236.5
Not Available TOB licensed receivers
5M' 2251
2.2 GHz channel plan and embargo 23 (ref. 3) Earth Stations
6I' 2265.5
6M' 2280
* See ref. 7 for definition of these areas and the map at Figure 1
[2.1 GHz - Page 10 of 22]

THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
1. Protection ratios required between digital systems applicable when both the Victim and Interferer
operate under these channel arrangements only.
14.5 MHz→ 14.5 MHz→ 29 MHz→ 29 MHz→

14.5 MHz 29 MHz 14.5 MHz 29 MHz
0 60 60 60 60
14.5 30 45 55 57
29 23 20 30
2. Protection ratios required between digital and analogue systems applicable when both the Victim
and Interferer operate under these channel arrangements only.

(MHz)
Analogue Interferer Tx Digital Interferer Tx
↓ ↓
29 MHz → 29 MHz → 14.5 MHz→ 29 MHz →

14.5 MHz 29 MHz 29 MHz
29 MHz
0 60 60 60 60
14.5 42 55 40 58
29 21 0 30
[2.1 GHz - Page 11 of 22]

3. Protection ratios between analogue systems.
29 MHz → 29 MHz
0 60
14.5 50
29 20
[2.1 GHz - Page 12 of 22]

THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)
4. Protection ratios required between digital systems where the Victim operates under the 2.2 GHz
band channel arrangements and the Interferer operates under these channel arrangements. See
Note 2 below.
14.5 MHz→ 14 MHz 29 MHz→ 14 MHz
0 60 60
14.5 30 55
29 20
5. Protection ratios required between digital systems where the Victim operates under these
channel arrangements and the Interferer operates under the 2.2 GHz band channel
arrangements. See Note 2 below.
14 MHz→ 14.5 MHz 14 MHz→ 29 MHz
0 60 60
14.5 30 45
29 23
6. Protection ratios required between digital systems operating under the 2.2 GHz band channel
arrangements and analogue systems operating under these channel arrangements. See Note 2
below.

(MHz)
[2.1 GHz - Page 13 of 22]

↓ ↓
29 MHz → 14 MHz 14 MHz→ 29 MHz
0 60 60
14.5 42 40
29 0
Notes:
1. Protection ratios for digital systems are based on a 60 km path length and PL (Percentage of
time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than or equal to
-100 N units/km) of 20. For other path lengths and PL values refer to the appropriate protection ratio
2. Part 3.1.7 "Protection Ratios and Interference Criteria" of this RALI gives guidance on how to
apply the protection ratio requirements when RF channel arrangements are overlaid with a pre-existing
arrangement or other overlaid arrangements.
[2.1 GHz - Page 14 of 22]

THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)
[2.1 GHz - Page 15 of 22]

10
-5
-10
-15
-20
PL=5
PL=10
PL=20
-25
-30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Path Length (km)
MULTI PATH
PL: Percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than
or equal to -100 N units/km.
[2.1 GHz - Page 16 of 22]

[2.1 GHz - Page 17 of 22]

THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)
Figure 1: 3G Spectrum Licensed Area Boundaries and Coordination Threshold Contours
[2.1 GHz - Page 18 of 22]

THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)
Figure 2: Fixed link embargo areas in the bands 2010-2100 MHz
[2.1 GHz - Page 19 of 22]

[2.1 GHz - Page 20 of 22]

THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)
[2.1 GHz - Page 21 of 22]

[2.1 GHz - Page 22 of 22]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
fo 2302
2155
1900 2300
2110
2076
2170 2200
20 5
20 5
20 5
20 5
21 5
.5
22 5
22 5
22 5
22 5
22 5
.5
.
.
32
46
60
74
88
02
07
21
35
49
63
77
20
22
1 2 3 4 5 6 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6'
2081.5 2106 2294.5

14 MHz
175 MHz
2.1 GHz Band 3G Spectrum Licensed Band. Mobile satellite service band.
fixed service spectrum. No new fixed services No new fixed services
City and Regional Australia-wide
2.3 GHz Spectrum Licensed Band.
No new assignments are to be made in the bands 2010-2110 MHz and 2200-2300 MHz in the areas
identified in Embargo 23 and show in Figure 2 and 3. This band is otherwise designated for use by
medium capacity fixed point-to-point links.
Notes:
1. Proposed fixed links must be coordinated with spectrum licences operating in the 3G band
2. DELETED.
3. Proposed fixed links must be coordinated with spectrum licences operating in the 2.3 GHz band
[2.2 GHz - Page 1 of 23]

4. Proposed fixed links must be coordinated with earth stations operating in this band (Assignment
Restrictions 4 and ref. 6).
5. Proposed fixed links must take account of the requirements for geostationary satellite orbit
avoidance (Assignment Restrictions 5).
6. Proposed fixed links must be coordinated with fixed receivers supporting aeronautical mobile
telemetry systems (Assignment Restrictions 6 and ref. 7).
7. There is potential for interference to fixed links on some channels due to the operation of
aeronautical mobile telemetry transmitters (Assignment Restrictions 7 and ref. 7).
8. DELETED
9. There is potential for interference to and from 2.1 GHz band fixed services sharing the same
spectrum (Assignment Restrictions 8).
10. New Fixed (and mobile) assignments in the frequency ranges 2010-2110 MHz and 2200-2300 MHz
are embargoed for specific areas identified in Attachment 1 of Embargo 23, (ref. 8, Figure 2 and 3)
11. DELETED
12. DELETED
13. DELETED
14. DELETED.
15. Prospective new apparatus licensed assignments within specified zones around specified radio
astronomy facilities and with emission bandwidths in the frequency range 2200-2550 MHz must
be notified to CSIRO (ref. 12).
16. Proposed fixed links must be coordinated with fixed TOB collection stations (Assignment
Restrictions 10 ref.13).
17. No new assignments within 100km of the Radio Quiet Zone in the bands 1900-2300 MHz (ref. 14).
18. No new assignments within 300km of Mingenew in the bands 2100-2130 MHz and 2280-2310
MHz otherwise 150km for assignments below 12 GHz (ref. 15).
References:
1. Rec. ITU-R F.1098-1, "Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in
the 1900 - 2300 MHz Band".
2. DELETED
3. DELETED
4. "Radiocommunications (Spectrum Designation) Notice No.1 of 2000 [January 2000]".
5. DELETED.
6. RALI MS 26, "Coordination of Microwave Fixed Services with Earth Stations".
[2.2 GHz - Page 2 of 23]

7. Spectrum Planning Report 2001/10, "Coordination Information for Defence Aeronautical Mobile
Telemetry Systems Operating in the 2200 to 2300 MHz Frequency Range".
11. DELETED
12. RALI MS 31, "Notification Zones for Apparatus Licensed Services around Radio Astronomy
Facilities".
13. RALI FX 21 “Television Outside Broadcasting Services in the bands 1980-2110 MHz and 2170-2300
MHz”.
14. RALI MS 3, "Spectrum Embargoes", Embargo 41
15. RALI MS 3, "Spectrum Embargoes", Embargo 49
[2.2 GHz - Page 3 of 23]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
1. Coordination requirements with 3G spectrum licences
New assignments on channels 5 and 6 planned for operation within or adjacent to the capital city
boundaries (Figure 1) are subject to coordination with spectrum licensed devices operating in the 2110
to 2170 MHz frequency range in accordance with Appendix 7 of this RALI.
2. DELETED
3. Coordination requirements with spectrum licences operating in the 2.3 GHz band
Proposed fixed link assignments receiving in the 2256 to 2285 MHz frequency range or transmitting
in the 2266 to 2285 MHz frequency range must to be coordinated with spectrum licences operating
in the 2.3 GHz spectrum licensed band (2302 to 2400 MHz) (see ref. 4).
See Table 1 for channels that are subject to coordination with as outlined above.
4. Coordination requirements with earth stations
Proposed fixed link assignments must be coordinated with earth stations operating in the 2025 to 2120
MHz and 2200 to 2300 MHz bands. Coordination must be in accordance with the requirements of RALI
MS 26 (ref. 6).
See Table 1 for channels that are subject to coordination as outlined above.
5. Geostationary satellite orbit avoidance requirements
[2.2 GHz - Page 4 of 23]

Proposed fixed link assignments planned for operation in the 2025 to 2110 MHz and 2200 to 2290
MHz bands must take account of the requirements for geostationary satellite orbit avoidance at
Appendix 5 to this RALI.
See Table 1 for affected channels.
[2.2 GHz - Page 5 of 23]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
6. Coordination requirements with aeronautical mobile telemetry receivers
Aeronautical mobile telemetry (AMT) receivers operate in the 2200 to 2300 MHz frequency range in
certain locations in Australia. New assignments for fixed links must be coordinated with the AMT
receivers identified in ref. 7. Reference 7 provides the necessary location and coordination parameters.
Note: Assigners should note that the information contained is ref. 7 is of an interim nature pending
finalisation of sharing issues. Contact the Manager, Spectrum Engineering Section, Spectrum Planning
and Engineering Branch for information on progress on finalisation.
7. Potential for interference from aeronautical mobile telemetry transmitters
Aeronautical mobile telemetry (AMT) transmitters operate in the 2200 to 2300 MHz frequency range in
certain areas of Australia. New assignments for fixed links will not be afforded protection from AMT
transmitters operated in the areas described in ref. 7.
Note: Assigners should note that the information contained is ref. 7 is of an interim nature pending
further studies on sharing issues. Contact the Manager, Spectrum Engineering Section, Spectrum
Planning Branch for information on the progress of these studies.
AMT transmitters operate in the geographic areas and with the technical parameters described in ref. 7.
New assignments for links in these frequency ranges should note the potential for interference from
AMT transmitters. Advisory Note FF shall be applied to new assignments for fixed link receivers
operating in the 2200 to 2300 MHz frequency range within 350 km of the areas defined in ref. 7.
Advisory Note FF reads:
"No protection from interference caused by the operation of Defence aeronautical mobile telemetry
transmitters is afforded to this licence"
[2.2 GHz - Page 6 of 23]

coordinated with existing fixed link assignments in this band and in the 2.1 GHz band in accordance
with normal FX-3 assignment procedures.
[2.2 GHz - Page 7 of 23]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
9. Channels available for assignment
See Table 1 for a summary table of channels detailing channel availability and interservice coordination
requirements.
10. Coordination with licenced Television Outside Broadcasting (TOB) receivers
Proposed fixed link assignments in the frequency range 2010-2110 MHz and 2200-2300 MHz must be
coordinated with existing licensed TOB receivers (collection stations) using the method and parameters
outlined in RALI FX 21 (ref. 14).
11. Channels that may NOT be assigned
11.1 Embargo 23 RALI MS 3, Embargo 23 (ref. 3) requires that no new assignments are to be made in
the bands 2010-2110 MHz and 2200-2300 MHz in the areas identified in Embargo 23 and show in Figure
2. These frequency ranges represent spectrum that overlaps with the 2.2 GHz band channel
arrangements.
11.2 Embargo 41 RALI MS 3, No new assignments within 100km of the Radio Quiet Zone in the bands
1900-2300 MHz (ref. 14).
11.3 Embargo 49 RALI MS 3, No new assignments within 300km of Mingenew in the bands 2100-
2130 MHz and 2280-2310 MHz otherwise no new assignments within 150km of Mingenew for
channels below 12 GHz (ref. 15).
[2.2 GHz - Page 8 of 23]

[2.2 GHz - Page 9 of 23]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
Table 1: Channel Arrangements - Channel Availability and Inter-Service Coordination
Channel Centre (MHz) Channel Availability Inter-Service Coordination

Number
1 2032.5 Refer to Embargo 23 for channel availability (ref. 8) TOB, Earth Stations and Geostationary Satellite Orbital Avoidance
6 2102.5 Refer to Embargo 23 and 26 for channel availability TOB, Earth Stations and Geostationary Satellite Orbital Avoidance
(ref. 8, 9)
1' 2207.5 Refer to Embargo 23 for channel availability (ref. 8) TOB, Earth Stations and Geostationary Satellite Orbital Avoidance
Aeronautical Mobile Telemetry
[2.2 GHz - Page 10 of 23]

Aeronautical Mobile Telemetry and 2.3 GHz Spectrum Licences
5' 2263.5 Refer to Embargo 23 for channel availability (ref. 8) TOB, Earth Stations and Geostationary Satellite Orbital Avoidance,
[2.2 GHz - Page 11 of 23]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
1. Protection ratios required between digital systems applicable when both the Victim and Interferer
operate under these channel arrangements only.
14 MHz→ 14 MHz
0 60
14 30
2. Protection ratios required between digital systems where the Victim operates under these
channel arrangements and the Interferer operates under the 2.1 GHz band channel
arrangements. See Note 2 below.
14.5 MHz→ 14 MHz 29 MHz→ 14 MHz
0 60 60
14.5 30 55
29 20
3. Protection ratios required between digital systems where the Victim operates under the 2.1 GHz
band channel arrangements and the Interferer operates under these channel arrangements. See
Note 2 below.
[2.2 GHz - Page 12 of 23]

14 MHz→ 14.5 MHz 14 MHz→ 29 MHz
0 60 60
14.5 30 45
29 23
[2.2 GHz - Page 13 of 23]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
4. Protection ratios required between digital systems operating under these channel arrangements
and analogue systems operating under the 2.1 GHz band channel arrangements. See Note 2
below.

(MHz)
↓ ↓
29 MHz → 14 MHz 14 MHz→ 29 MHz
0 60 60
14.5 42 40
29 0
Notes:
2. Part 3.1.7 "Protection Ratios and Interference Criteria" of this RALI gives guidance on how to
apply the protection ratio requirements when RF channel arrangements are overlaid with a
pre-existing arrangement or other overlaid arrangements.
[2.2 GHz - Page 14 of 23]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
[2.2 GHz - Page 15 of 23]

10
-5
-10
-15
-20
PL=5
PL=10
PL=20
-25
-30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Path Length (km)
MULTI PATH
PL: Percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than
[2.2 GHz - Page 16 of 23]

[2.2 GHz - Page 17 of 23]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
Figure 1: 3G Spectrum Licensed Area Boundaries - Capital Cities
[2.2 GHz - Page 18 of 23]

[2.2 GHz - Page 19 of 23]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
[2.2 GHz - Page 20 of 23]

[2.2 GHz - Page 21 of 23]

THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)
[2.2 GHz - Page 22 of 23]

[2.2 GHz - Page 23 of 23]

THE 2.5 GHz ENG BAND (2500 - 2690 MHz)
2500 2690
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ABC 7 9 10 ABC 7 9 10
2500 2523.5 2547.5 2571 2595 2619 2642.5 2666.5 2690
TOB Network Licences: 7 =Seven Network, 9 =Nine Network, 10 =Ten Network, ABC =ABC Network.
This band is no longer available for apparatus licensing as the band has been spectrum licenced.
See Embargo 26. The text below has been retained for historical reference only.
This band is identified primarily for use by Television Outside Broadcast (TOB) services
particularly Electronic News Gathering (ENG) applications.
Typical Use : temporary video links to provide live coverage of events
Assignment Priority : not applicable
Minimum Path Length : not specified
Antenna Requirements : 0.6 m standard parabolic dish
Notes:
1. Designated channel allocations for the major television networks on an Australia-wide
basis are shown above. New assignments will not normally be made on these channels, see
also notes 3 and 4.
2. The channelling arrangements shown above came into effect on 7 March 2005.
3. New and existing apparatus licensed assignments in all areas and with emissions in the
frequency range 2500-2690 MHz shall be endorsed with Advisory Note BL, but see also
notes 1 and 4 (Assignment Restrictions 1 and ref. 2).
4. New assignments of all types and in all areas and with emissions in the frequency range
2500-2690 MHz are embargoed (ref. 1).
References:
[2.5 GHz ENG - Page 1 of 1]

THE 3.4 GHz BAND (3425-3492.5 MHz)
3425 3442.5 3475 3492.5
For frequency assignment requirements see Reference 2 For frequency assignment requirements see Reference 2
50 MHz
These bands were originally designated for use by fixed point-to-multipoint services (in
particular, Wireless Local Loop (WLL) systems) Australia wide under apparatus licensing
arrangements. During 2000, these bands along with other spectrum in the 3.4 to 3.6 GHz range
were re-allocated for spectrum licensing in some areas of Australia, including all capital cities
(see Reference 1). The remaining areas are still available for apparatus licensing in accordance
with Reference 2.
Note:
1. Specific requirements for apparatus licensing this band are given in Reference 2.
2. New assignments within this band are subject to limitations - see Reference 3.
3. Requests for assignments within 150 km of the GPOs of Darwin (NT) or Geraldton (WA) are
to be referred to the Manager, Customer Services Coordination Team, Customer Services
Group, Canberra Central Office, ACA, for preliminary coordination consultation 1.
References
1. Radiocommunications (Spectrum Re-allocation) Declaration 2000
2. RALI FX 14 “Point to Multipoint Fixed Services in Specified Parts of the 3.4 - 3.59 GHz
Band”.
3. RALI MS 3 “Spectrum Embargoes”, Embargo No. 26.
1
ACA file F89-207, held by Manager, Spectrum Planning and Engineering Team, Radiofrequency Planning Group,
refers.
[3.4 GHz - Page 1 of 1]
FX 3 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions January 2001

THE 3.8 GHz BAND (3580 - 4200 MHz)
This band is designated for use by digital high capacity fixed point-to-point links.

Notes:
1. Proposed fixed links need to be coordinated with licensed earth stations operating in this
band.
2. Requests for assignments within 150 km of the GPOs of Darwin (NT) or Geraldton (WA)
are to be referred to the Manager, Spectrum Engineering Section, Spectrum Planning
Branch for preliminary coordination consultation. ACMA file F1989/207, held by
Manager, Spectrum Engineering Section, Spectrum Planning Branch, refers.
3. Some channels are not available for new assignments (Assignment Restrictions 1).
4. There is potential for interference to and from former 4.0 GHz band fixed services
(Assignment Restrictions 2).
5. Proposed fixed links must be co-ordinated with fixed satellite services in this band
6. Proposed fixed links must be co-ordinated with radiolocation services in this band
7. Proposed fixed links must be co-ordinated with area-wide licence services in this band and
cannot be licensed within an existing area-wide licence service spectrum space unless
agreed to by the licensee (Assignment Restrictions 5).
8. Site sense compatibility (refer to section 3.3.3) and paired channel use does not apply in
this band, if co-sited parties can reach an agreement.
[3.8 GHz Band - Page 1 of 5]

THE 3.8 GHz BAND (3580 - 4200 MHz)
References:
1. Rec. ITU-R F.635-6, "Radio-frequency channel arrangements based on a homogeneous
pattern for radio-relay systems operating in the 4 GHz band".

THE 3.8 GHz BAND (3580 - 4200 MHz)
1. Channels that may not be assigned
Channels 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 are not available for assignment Australia-wide due to spectrum
licensing in metro and regional areas, and to support the deployment of wireless broadband
services in remote areas.
Proposed new assignments must be coordinated with existing fixed link assignments in this
band.
3. Coordination with fixed satellite service
The Australian Radiofrequency Spectrum Plan allocates the band 3600-4200 MHz to the fixed
satellite service on a primary basis and the band is utilised by earth station receive services.
Proposed new assignments are to be coordinated with these services.
4. Coordination with radio-location service
The Australian Radiofrequency Spectrum Plan allocates the band 3400-3600 MHz to the
radiolocation service on a primary basis. Proposed new assignments are to be coordinated with
these services.
5. Coordination with area-wide licence services
Proposed fixed links must be co-ordinated with services authorised under area-wide licences in
this band as required in RALI MS 47 and cannot be licensed within an existing area-wide licence
spectrum space unless agreed to by the licensee.

THE 3.8 GHz BAND (3580 - 4200 MHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
Protection ratios for digital services are:
Co-channel 60 dB
First adjacent channel 30 dB
Second adjacent channel 0 dB
Note:
time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than or
equal to -100 N units/km) of 20. For other path lengths and PL values refer to the protection ratio

THE 3.8 GHz BAND (3580 - 4200 MHz)
MULTI PATH
10
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
PL=5
PL=10
PL=20
-25
-30
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120
Path Length (km)

THE 5 GHz BAND (4400 - 5000 MHz)
fo
4400 4700 5000
4510 4550 4590 4630 4670 4810 4850 4890 4930 4970
3 4 5 6 7 3' 4' 5' 6' 7'
40 MHz
300 MHz
Effective July 1998, this band is only available for Defence assignments.
Reference 1 designates this band as primarily for the purposes of Defence (refer to Reference 1
footnotes AUS 1 and AUS 11 for precise provisions). Effective July 1998, no further applications
for non-Defence fixed link service use of the band may be accepted. Existing non-Defence fixed
digital high capacity point-to-point links may continue operation under the provisions of current
licences, which may be renewed subject to continuing endorsement of Special Condition 41
(Note 1).
Typical Use : 155 Mbit/s (STM-1)

Assignment Priority : no new assignments
Minimum Transmission Capacity : 68 Mbit/s
Antenna Requirements : 3.0 m high performance parabolic dish
Notes:
1. Non-Defence fixed link services shall not interfere with Defence radiocommunications
services and no protection from Defence services shall be afforded to non-Defence services
(refer to Special Condition 41).
2. Effective July 1998, this band is only available for Defence assignments.
3. All non-Defence assignments that have emissions in the 4940-4990 MHz range shall be
endorsed with Advisory Note BL, but see also note 2 (ref. 3).
References:
1. "Australian Radiofrequency Spectrum Plan".
2. Rec. ITU-R F.1099-3, "Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high-capacity digital
radio-relay systems in the 5 GHz (4400-5000 MHz) band", 1999.
[5 GHz - Page 1 of 1]
FX-3 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions August 2006

fo
5925 6175 6425
0 10 49
.2 85 50 15 80 45 75 24 89 54 19 84 14 79
5 4. 4. 4. 3. 3. 3. 2. 7. 6. 6. 6. 5. 5. 5. 4.
94 7 0 3 6 9
61
2 5 9 2 5 8 1
63
4 7 0
5 59 60 60 60 60 61 61 62 62 62 63 63 64
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8'
29.65 MHz
252.04 MHz
fo
5925 6175 6425
25 25 25 25 65 65 65 65
0 .0 9 .3 8 .6 .9 2 .0 1 .3 0 .6 9 .9
7
5 96 6 01 607 13 621 627 633 6 38
6
1 2 3 4 1' 2' 3' 4'
59.3 MHz
252.04 MHz
This band is designated for use by medium and high capacity fixed point-to-point links.
Typical Use : 29.65 MHz channels - 34 Mbit/s data, FM Video

: 59.3 MHz channels - 197 Mbit/s data
Assignment Priority : 59.3 MHz channels - from lowest channel upwards
Note:
1. Proposed links need to be coordinated with licensed earth stations operating in this band.
2. The channel raster known previously as the interleaved raster is grandfathered. No new
assignments are to be made; existing services may continue to operate.
3. Potential for interference to and from adjacent 6.7 GHz band fixed services.
Reference
1. Rec. ITU-R F.383-5, “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for high capacity radio-relay
systems operating in the lower 6 GHz band”.

PROTECTION RATIOS

29.65 MHz 29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz 59.3 MHz
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz 29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz
0 60 68
14.825 57 67 56
29.65 30
44.475 36 25
59.3 34
74.125 13 13
103.775 7 3
118.6 13

(MHz)
↓ ↓
29.65 MHz 29.65 MHz
↓ ↓
29.65 MHz 29.65 MHz
0 60 60
14.825 55 58
29.65 21 30

29.65 MHz → 29.65 MHz
0 60
14.825 50
29.65 20

4. Protection ratios required between digital systems in the adjacent 6.7 GHz band.

29.65 MHz 29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz 59.3 MHz
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
55.21 10.5
70.035 16
75.21 19.5
90.035 25
110.035 4
170.035 10
Notes:

MULTI PATH
15
10
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
PL=5
-30 PL=10
PL=20
-35
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Path Length (km)

THE 6.7 GHz BAND (6425 - 7110 MHz)
fo
6425 6770 7110
60 00 40 80 20 6 0 00 40 00 40 80 20 6 0 00 40 80
64 65 65 65 66 66 67 67 68 68 68 69 69 70 70 70
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8'
40 MHz
340 MHz
fo
6425 6770 7110
80 60 40 20 20 00 80 60
64 65 66 67 68 69 69 70
1 2 3 4 1' 2' 3' 4'
80 MHz
340 MHz
This band is designated for use by digital high capacity fixed point-to-point links.
Typical Use : 40 MHz channels - 140 Mbit/s data

: 80 MHz channels - 298 Mbit/s data
Assignment Priority : 80 MHz channels - from highest channel downwards
Note:
1. Proposed links need to be coordinated with licensed earth stations operating in this band.
2. The channel raster known previously as the interleaved raster has been removed. No new
assignments are to be made.
3. Potential for interference to and from adjacent 6 GHz band fixed services.
Reference
1. Rec. ITU-R F.384-5, “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for medium and high capacity
analogue or high capacity digital radio-relay systems operating in the upper 6 GHz band”.
[6.7 GHz - Page 1 of 3]

THE 6.7 GHz BAND (6425 - 7110 MHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS

(MHz) Interferer Tx → Victim Rx
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0 60 69
20 68 56
40 30
60 50 35
80 0 46
100 15 12
140 8 4
160 15
2. Protection ratios required between digital systems in the adjacent 6 GHz band.

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz 29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz
55.21 12
70.035 20
75.21 15
84.86 1.5
90.035 24
104.86 10
Note:
time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than or
equal to -100 N units/km) of 20. For other path lengths and PL values refer to the protection ratio
[6.7 GHz - Page 2 of 3]

THE 6.7 GHz BAND (6425 - 7110 MHz)
MULTI PATH
15
10
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
PL=5
-30 PL=10
PL=20
-35
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Path Length (km)

[6.7 GHz - Page 3 of 3]

THE 7.2 GHz BAND (7100 - 7425 MHz)
7250 7375 7425

7100
Consultation and Coordination Sited stations
with Defence Required (Note 9)
7109
7117
7125
7133
7141
7149
7157
7165
7173
7181
7189
7197
7205
7213
7221
7229
7237
7245
7253
7261
7269
7277
7285
7293
7301
7309
7317
7325
7333
7341
7349
7357
7365
7373
7381
7389
7397
7405
7413
7421
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
7
9
9
9
9
9
7
7
7
9
9
9
9
7
7
7
7
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
8 MHz
7 Seven Network (7)

9 Nine Network (9)
10 Network Ten (10)
S Shared General (S)
Frequency Channel Channel centre Range of integer First channel–last

limits bandwidth frequency values for channel centre
(MHz) (MHz) formula (MHz) variable ‘n’ frequency (MHz)
7105– 7425 8 7101 + n (8) 1 to 40 7109–7421
Consultation and Coordination with licensed

Channel Channel
coordination with defence earth station receivers
allocation number
required? required?
16–18 No No
Shared (S) 31–34 Yes Yes
35–40 No Yes
11–15 No No
Seven Network (7)
27–30 Yes Yes
1–5 No No
Nine Network (9)
23–26 Yes Yes
Network Ten (10) 6–10 No No
[7.2 GHz - Page 1 of 5]

This band is designated for use by Television Outside Broadcast (TOB) services.
Typical use : temporary video links providing live coverage of events

Previous channel arrangements

Previous channel arrangements which provided were replaced these channel arrangements on 28
October 2022. No new assignments are to be made to the old channel arrangements. Existing
services are to transition to the new arrangements. For new shared channels 16,17 &18 note there
are existing licences issued before the commence of these arrangements and these should be
consider under Assignment restriction 4 (that is consider whether operations will be in the same
area).
Notes:
1. All TOB transmitters in the bands 7100 to 7425 MHz operate subject to the condition that
they do not cause interference to other services (see Reference 1). The coordination criteria
outlined in this RALI will be used in the consideration of any interference.
2. Deleted.
3. Channels designated ‘S’ are for shared general use and can be licensed by any entity for
TOB use.
4. Defence must be consulted when a non-Defence licence applicant requests an assignment in
the frequency range 7250 to 7375 MHz (see assignment restriction 1).
assignments are to be made in accordance with that raster.
6. Earth transmit stations in the space research (Earth-space) service operate at New Norcia
and Tidbinbilla in the bands 7145 to 7235 MHz. Services that operate in and adjacent to this
earth station transmit band do so on the basis that they are not afforded protection from
interference from earth station transmitters at the New Norcia and Tidbinbilla facilities.
7. Channels marked with 7, 9 or 10 are for exclusive use by the Seven Network, Nine Network
Australia and Network Ten respectively.
8. Earth receive stations and TOB services in the band 7375 to 7425 MHz need to be
coordinated as detailed in assignment restriction 3.
9. Shared channels with area-wide access areas are not afforded protection from other services.
To increase visibility to other licensees, commonly used sites can be recorded as special
conditions on assignments with area-wide access areas.
10. The potential for interference between TOB services is to be managed in accordance with
assignment restriction 4.
11. Chanel bandwidth are notional and larger bandwidths can be assigned provided the
assignment is within the segment limits. For example, assignments for shared channels can
have bandwidths greater than 8 MHz, provided the bandwidth only overlaps channels
allocated for shared usage.
[7.2 GHz - Page 2 of 5]

References:
1. Radiocommunications Licence Conditions (Fixed Licence) Determination 2015.
2. Australian Radiofrequency Spectrum Plan 2021, May 2021.
3. RALI MS 03, Spectrum Embargoes – embargos 47, 49 and 59.
4. Recommendation SF.1006: ‘Determination of the interference potential between earth
stations of the fixed-satellite service and stations in the fixed service’.
5. Recommendation ITU-R S.465: ‘Reference radiation pattern of earth station antennas in the
fixed-satellite service for use in coordination and interference assessment in the frequency
range from 2 to 31 GHz’.
6. Recommendation ITU-R P.452: ‘Prediction procedure for the evaluation of interference
between stations on the surface of the Earth at frequencies above about 0.1 GHz’ using 20%
time percentage.
[7.2 GHz - Page 3 of 5]

THE 7.2 GHz BAND (7100 - 7425 MHz)
ASSIGNMENT RESTRICTION
1. Non-Defence assignments between 7250 and 7375 MHz

The frequency range 7250 to 7375 MHz (channels 19 to 34) is subject to footnote AUS100 in
reference 2. In accordance with this footnote, assignments to non-Defence licence applicants
must not be made in this frequency range unless Defence has been consulted and the licence
applicant agrees to coordinate with Defence prior to each transmission being undertaken.
Licence applicants are to consult with Defence before applying for a licence and send details of
agreed coordination arrangements to Manager, Spectrum Planning Section via
[email protected].
Special Condition FH must be applied to all the licences in this band. Special Condition FH
reads:
The licensee must coordinate any proposed transmissions in the frequency range
7250 MHz to 7375 MHz with the Department of Defence before commencing such
transmissions.
2. TOB exclusion zones

There are a number of embargoes that restrict TOB assignments. Refer to RALI MS 03 to
confirm current restrictions. Currently (at the time this channel plan was prepared) TOB
assignments are not permitted in the areas and frequencies as listed in RALI MS 03 Embargos
47, 49 and 59 (reference 3):
• Embargo 47: 7250–7425 MHz near Geraldton WA
• Embargo 49: 7135–7245 MHz and 7250–7425 MHz near Mingenew WA
• Embargo 59: 7250–7425 MHz near Kapooka NSW.
3. Coordination requirements with earth station receivers in the

7375–7425 MHz band
To facilitate the use of shared TOB channels, the coordination requirements in the 7375–
7425 MHz band have been designed to support handheld-like TOB cameras (with a maximum
EIRP of 26 dBm and a notional antenna height of 1.5 m). Coordination of proposed TOB
services consistent with these parameters is not required beyond a distance of 75 km from a
licensed earth station receiver that has overlapping frequencies and operates in the 7375–
7425 MHz band.
Sited TOB services that operate above these parameters will be considered on a case-by-case
basis, provided it can be demonstrated that the protection requirements for earth station receivers
are achieved.
[7.2 GHz - Page 4 of 5]

Coordination between a proposed TOB transmitter and earth station receiver is deemed
completed if the received power from the TOB transmitter at the earth station receiver is less
than -158.6 dBW/MHz (derived from Recommendation SF.1006 – see reference 4).
The antenna pattern of the earth station antenna should be used if known. Otherwise, the latest
version of Recommendation ITU-R S.465 should be used (see reference 5).
When calculating interference levels, propagation model P.452 using 20% time percentage
should be used with Digital Elevation Model of 3 seconds or better (see reference 6).
Note: Proposed earth station receivers are required to be coordinated with existing licensed sited
TOB stations.
4. Coordination requirements between TOB services

Shared channels and airborne transmitters
To facilitate sharing, airborne TOB transmitters (e.g., aboard helicopters) are not intended to be
supported on shared channels. Usage will be considered on a case-by-case basis.
Coordination of shared channels
There are no coordination requirements between TOB services on shared channels. Shared
channels are to be self-managed within the TOB industry to manage interference. TOB licensees
are encouraged to coordinate usage of shared channels with other TOB licensees.
Adjacent channel coordination
TOB licensees are to self-coordinate adjacent channel use with other TOB licensees.
5. Coordination requirements with space research services

Space research services transmit in the 7145 to 7235 MHz band from New Norcia (WA) and
Tidbinbilla (ACT), and TOB services are not afforded protection from these services.
[7.2 GHz - Page 5 of 5]

THE 7.5 GHz BAND (7425 - 7725 MHz)
fo
7575
7425 7564.5 7725
7498
7477
7554
7687
7701
7708
7715
7722
7428
7435
7442
7449
7463
7470
7484
7491
7505
7512
7526
7533
7540
7561
7596
7603
7610
7624
7631
7638
7645
7652
7659
7666
7673
7680
7694
7456
7519
7547
7589
7617
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10 ' 11 ' 12' 13' 14' 15 ' 16 ' 17' 18' 19' 20'
7 MHz
161 MHz
fo
7575
7425 7564.5 7725
7704.5
7445.5
7459.5
7473.5
7487.5
7515.5
7557.5
7592.5
7620.5
7662.5
7718.5
7431.5
7501.5
7529.5
7543.5
7606.5
7634.5
7648.5
7676.5
7690.5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10'
14 MHz
161 MHz
This band is designated for use by low-medium capacity fixed point-to-point links.
Typical Use : 2-17 Mbit/s data

Assignment Priority : See Note 1.
Notes:
1. Assignment priorities are defined as follows:
14 MHz channels - from the highest channel downward;

7 MHz channels - from the lowest channel upward.
2. Co-ordination with Defence is required for assignments in Canberra. All Defence

co-ordination requirements should be addressed through ACA Central Office.
3. Assignments should not be made on the 7 MHz Ch1 to avoid band edge interference.
4. Potential for interference to and from adjacent 8 GHz band fixed services.
References
1. Rec. ITU-R F.385-6, “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems

operating in the 7 GHz band”.
[7.5 GHz - Page 1 of 4]

THE 7.5 GHz BAND (7425 - 7725 MHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
1. Protection ratios required between digital systems operating on the same channel raster.
Co Channel: 60 dB
1st Adjacent Channel 30 dB
2nd Adjacent Channel 0 dB
2. Protection ratios between systems using 3.5 MHz channels and systems using either 7
MHz or 14 MHz channels - see note 2.

(MHz)
3.5 MHz* 7 MHz 3.5 MHz* 14 MHz 3.5 MHz* 18 MHz*
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
7 MHz 3.5 MHz* 14 MHz 3.5 MHz* 18 MHz* 3.5 MHz*
1.75 60 60 60 60 60 60
5.25 55 48 60 55 60 60
8.75 18 20 55 40 60 55
12.25 30 30 55 40
15.75 10 30 30
3. Protection ratios between systems using either 7 MHz or 14 MHz channels and systems
using 18 MHz channels - see note 3.

(MHz)
7 MHz 14 MHz 7 MHz 18 MHz* 14 MHz 18 MHz*
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
14 MHz 7 MHz 18 MHz* 7 MHz 18 MHz* 14 MHz
0 60 60 60 60 60 60
7 50 45 60 55 60 60
14 36 27 45 30 55 50
21 30 30

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz 29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz
10.875 58
14.375 54.5
25.7 64
29.2 61
Notes:
[7.5 GHz - Page 2 of 4]

or equal to -100 N units/km) of 20, for other path lengths and PL values refer to the
appropriate path length correction factors graph on the following page.
2. The 3.5 MHz* table heading denotes systems operating under earlier arrangements which
require 3.5 MHz bandwidth, new assignments are to be coordinated around these systems.
3. The 18 MHz* table heading denotes systems operating under earlier arrangements which
require 18 MHz bandwidth, new assignments are to be coordinated around these systems.
[7.5 GHz - Page 3 of 4]

THE 7.5 GHz BAND (7425 - 7725 MHz)
MULTI PATH
15
10
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
PL=5
-30 PL=10
PL=20
-35
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Path Length (km)
PL: Percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less
than or equal to -100 N units/km.
[7.5 GHz - Page 4 of 4]

This band is designated for use by medium and high capacity fixed point-to-point links.
Typical Use : 29.65 MHz channels - 34 Mbit/s data, FM Video

: 59.3 MHz channels - 197 Mbit/s data
Assignment Priority : See Notes 1 & 2.
Note:
1. No assignments shall be made on 29.65 MHz channels 7 and 8 (main and interleaf) and 59.3
MHz channel 4, except in cases where the availability of other channels in the band is
precluded through unsuccessful coordination.
29.65 MHz channels – from the lowest channel upwards

59.3 MHz channels – from channel 3/3’ downwards
2. The channel raster known previously as the main raster is grandfathered. No new
assignments are to be made; existing services may continue to operate.
3. Potential for interference to and from adjacent 7.5 GHz band fixed services.

Reference


PROTECTION RATIOS

29.65 MHz 29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz 59.3 MHz
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz 29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz
0 60 68
14.825 57 67 56
29.65 30
44.475 36 25
59.3 34
74.125 13 13
103.775 7 3
118.6 13

(MHz)
↓ ↓
29.65 MHz 29.65 MHz
↓ ↓
29.65 MHz 29.65 MHz
0 60 60
14.825 55 58
29.65 21 30

29.65 MHz → 29.65 MHz
0 60
14.825 50
29.65 20

4. Protection ratios required between digital systems in the adjacent 7.5 GHz band.

29.65 MHz 29.65 MHz 59.3 MHz 59.3 MHz
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
10.875 53
14.375 52.5
17.875 30
24.875 19
25.7 48
28.375 20
29.2 47
31.875 14
32.7 31
38.875 9
39.7 14
42.375 10
43.2 17
45.875 4
46.7 13
53.7 12
57.2 14
60.7 10
67.7 9
71.2 11
74.7 7
81.7 4
85.2 6
Notes:

MULTI PATH
15
10
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
PL=5
-30 PL=10
PL=20
-35
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
Path Length (km)


8275 8400
28 MHz
1 3 5 7
ABC S ABC S
8275 8303 8331 8359 8387
MAIN
8275 8400
28 MHz
2 4 6 8
ABC
S S ABC
8289 8317 8345 8373 8401
INTERLEAVED
TOB Network Licences : ABC = ABC Network
TOB Provisions : S = Shared General
This band is designated for use by Television Outside Broadcast (TOB) services.
Typical Use : temporary video links providing live coverage of events

Notes:
1. Channels 1, 2, 5 and 8 are reserved for the ABC on an Australia-wide basis.
2. Channels designated ‘S’ are for general shared use. These channels are not normally
available for assignment on an exclusive basis - for special case situations see Reference 1.
3. Main pattern usage has priority over that of the interleaved pattern. Special condition 27
shall be applied to all spectrum accesses relating to TOB operations on interleaved channels.
4. Earth receive stations in the space research (space–to-Earth) service operate at New Norcia in
the adjacent 8400-8500 MHz frequency band. Under the Radiocommunications Licence
Condition (Fixed Licence) Determination, television outside broadcast stations operate on the
condition that harmful interference is not caused to other services. The operation of TOB
services on channel 8 is restricted about the New Norcia earth station facility in Western
Australia. See Operating Restrictions about the New Norcia Earth Station Facility.
References
1. Spectrum Planning Policy Document SPP3/95, “Television Outside Broadcast (TOB) Service
- 7.2 GHz and 8.3 GHz RF Channel Arrangements”, July 1995.
2, RALI MS43 JAN 2016
[8.3 GHz - Page 1 of 2]

OPERATING RESTRICTIONS ABOUT THE NEW NORCIA EARTH STATION
FACILITY
For TOB services operating on channel 8:

• Operation of transmitters is not allowed without the prior approval of the New Norcia earth
station licensee within the areas covered by the Hierarchical Cell Identification Scheme
(HCIS) cell identifiers BU8I7, BU8I8, BU8I9, BU8J7, BU8J8, BU8M2, BU8M3, BU8N,
BU8M5, BU8M6, BU8O4, BU7P9, BU8M7, BU8M8, BU8M9, BV2A1, BV2A2, BV2A3,
BV2B1, BV2A6, BV2B4. For a graphical representation of this area, refer to RALI MSXX,
Annex D Figure 1 or use the ACMA HCIS converter
(http://www.acma.gov.au/theACMA/convert-hcis-area-description-to-a-placemark).
• No operations are allowed in the band 8400-8401 within 150km of the New Norcia earth
station.
• The level of emissions received at the New Norcia facility in the band 8400-8500 MHz, from
transmitters operating on channel 8 is not to exceed the levels specified in RALI MS43.
The New Norcia facility is located at -31.049444°, 116.190000° (ADG66). Refer RALI MS43
[8.3 GHz - Page 2 of 2]

THE 10 GHz BAND (10.55 - 10.68 GHz)
10.55 10.68
8 3 0 7 4 1
55 565 0.572 0.579 0.586 0.593 0.600 0.607 0.614 10.
62 63 63
10.
64 65 658 665 672
10. 10. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10. 10. 10. 10. 10. 10.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8'
7 MHz
65 MHz
10.55 10.68
10.5615 10.5755 10.5895 10.6035 10.6265 10.6405 10.6545 10.6685
1 2 3 4 1' 2' 3' 4'
14 MHz
65 MHz
Typical Use : 2 Mbit/s data, narrow-deviation FM video

Notes:
7 MHz channels - from the lowest channel upward;

14 MHz channels - from the highest channel downward; and
for one-way links using the 7 MHz channels - channel 9 should be utilised first.
2. In accordance with Radio Regulations Resolution 751 (WRC-07), fixed links must meet
assignment criteria (Assignment Restrictions 1)
3. Potential for interference to and from adjacent 11 GHz band fixed services
References
1. Rec. ITU-R F.747, “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating in
the 10 GHz band”.
2. Radio Regulations Resolution 751 (WRC-07), “Sharing criteria in the band 10.6-10.68 GHz”

Assignment Criteria
1. In accordance with ITU-R Radio Regulation Resolution 751 (WRC-07), fixed services in
the 10.6 – 10.68 GHz band are required to meet the following parameters in order to reduce
the interference to EESS from fixed services.
Parameter Value
Maximum elevation angle 20°
Maximum transmitter power at the antenna port -15 dBW
THE 10 GHz BAND (10.55 - 10.68 GHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
1. Protection ratios required between systems operating on 7 and 14 MHz channels.

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0 55 60 55 60
3.5 60 55
7 30 55 51 60
10.5 50 40
14 18 25 15 50
17.5 10 0

7 MHz 14 MHz
↓ ↓
80 MHz 80 MHz
83 8
86.5 8
Notes:
1. Protection ratio for digital systems are based on a 30 km path length and PL (Percentage of time
that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than or equal
to -100 N units/km) of 20. For other path lengths, rainfall rates and PL values refer to the
appropriate propagation path correction factors graph on the following page.

THE 10 GHz BAND (10.55 - 10.68 GHz)
RAIN AND MULTI PATH
15
10
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
PL=5
PL=10
PL=20
-25
R=60 mm/hr
R=80 mm/hr
-30
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
Path Length (km)
PL:Percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than or
R: Rainfall rate in mm/hr for 0.01% of the worst month.

11 GHz BAND (10.7 - 11.7 GHz)
This band is designated for use by digital high capacity fixed point-to-point links (see Notes).
Typical Use : 40 MHz channels - 140/155 Mbit/s data

: 80 MHz channels - 298 Mbit/s data
Assignment Priority : 80 MHz channels – highest channel downwards
Note:
1. Deleted
2. Proposed fixed links need to be coordinated with earth stations operating in this band.
3. Requests for assignments within 150 km of the GPOs of Darwin (NT) or Geraldton (WA) are
to be referred to the Manager, Customer Services Coordination Team, Customer Services
Group, Canberra Central Office, ACA, for preliminary coordination consultation 1.
assignments are to be made to that raster.
5. Potential for interference to and from adjacent 10 GHz band fixed services
Reference
1. Rec. ITU-R F.387-6, “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio relay systems
1
ACA file F89-207, held by Manager, Spectrum Planning and Engineering Team, Radiofrequency Planning Group,
refers.

11 GHz BAND (10.7 - 11.7 GHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS

(MHz) Interferer Tx → Victim Rx
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0 60 69
20 68 56
40 30
60 50 35
80 0 46
100 15 12
140 8 4
160 15

80 MHz 80 MHz
↓ ↓
7 MHz 14 MHz
83 7
86.5 10
90 6
97 5
100.5 7
104 3
111 2
114.5 5
Notes:
or equal to -100 N units/km) of 20. For other path lengths, rainfall rates and PL values refer to
the protection ratio correction factors graph on the following page.

11 GHz BAND (10.7 - 11.7 GHz)
MULTI PATH
15
10
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
PL=5
PL=10
PL=20
-25 R=60 mm/hr
R=80 mm/hr
-30
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
Path Length (km)

THE 13 GHz BAND (12.75 - 13.25 GHz)
fo
13.00 13.25
12.75
266 MHz
12.765 12.793 12.821 12.877 13.031 13.059 13.087 13.143
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8'

9 10 9 10 ABC 7 ABC 7
01
29
85
13
57
19
47
75
41
91
35
63
.1
.1
.1
.2
.1
.9
.9
.9
.2
.8
.8
.8
13
13
13
13
13
12
12
12
13
12
12
12
MAIN
fo
12.75 13.00 13.25
266 MHz
12.779 12.807 12.835 12.891 13.045 13.073 13.101 13.157
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8'

7 ABC 7 ABC 10 9 10 9
99
50
61
15
27
05
33
89
43
71
49
77
.1
.2
.9
.1
.2
.9
.9
.9
.1
.1
.8
.8
13
13
12
13
13
12
12
12
13
13
12
12
INTERLEAVED
TOB Network Licences : 7 = Seven Network; 9 = Nine Network; 10 = Ten Network; ABC = ABC Network
This band is designated for use by medium capacity fixed point-to-point links and Television
Outside Broadcast (TOB) services (See Notes 1 to 6).
Typical Use : FIXED - 34 Mbit/s data
TOB - temporary links for live coverage of events
teleconferencing, outside broadcast, etc.
Antenna Requirements : FIXED - refer to Appendix 11
TOB - 0.6 m standard parabolic dish
Notes:
1. With the exception of interleaved channel 8', all channels are 28 MHz wide.
2. Fixed assignments may be made only on main channels 1-1', 2-2', 3-3' and 5-5'. However,
assignments for fixed services on channels 5-5' are not permitted within 100 km of a capital
city.
3. TOB channel designations for the major television networks are shown above.
4. Non-network TOB operators share channels 5-5'.
5. TOB assignments shall be endorsed with Special Condition 27.
6. TOB sharing arrangements are described in Reference 1.

References
1. Spectrum Planning Document No. SP 1/90, “Spectrum and Licensing Arrangements for
Outside Broadcast Television Services” March 1990.
operating in the 13 GHz frequency band”.

THE 13 GHz BAND (12.75 - 13.25 GHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0 50 50 50 50
14 20 35 45 47

(MHz)
↓ ↓
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0 50 50 60 60
14 35 45 40 55

28 MHz → 28 MHz
0 60
14 50
Notes:
1. Protection ratios for digital systems are based on a 20 km path length and R (Rainfall rate
in mm/hr for 0.01% of the worst month) of 80 mm/hr. For other path lengths, rainfall rates and
PL (Percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the
atmosphere is less than or equal to -100 N units/km) values refer to the appropriate protection
ratio correction factors graph on the following page.

THE 13 GHz BAND (12.75 - 13.25 GHz)
RAIN AND MULTI PATH
20
15
10
5
-5
-10
-15
PL=5
PL=10
PL=20
-20
R=60 mm/hr
R=80 mm/hr
-25
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80
Path Length (km)
PL:Percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than
R: Rainfall rate in mm/hr for 0.01% of the worst month. For further details refer to Annex A to Appendix 1.

THE 15 GHz BAND (14.5 - 15.35 GHz)
Typical Use : low capacity - 2/8 Mbit/s

: medium capacity - 34 Mbit/s

Note:
28 MHz channels - from channel 6/6’ downward;

14 MHz channels - from lowest channel upward; and
7 MHz channels - from lowest channel upward.
2. No assignments shall be made on channel 7/7’, except in cases where the availability of other
channels in the band is precluded through unsuccessful coordination.
References
1. Rec. ITU-R F.636-3, “Radio-frequency channel arrangements for radio-relay systems operating
in the 15 GHz band”.
FX-3 Appendix 1 October 2014

THE 15 GHz BAND (14.5 - 15.35 GHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
1. Protection ratios between digital systems operating on the same channel arrangements.
Co Channel 60 dB
2. Protection ratios between digital systems requiring 7 and 14 MHz channels.

7 MHz → 14 MHz 14 MHz → 7 MHz
7 60 59
10.5 58 49
14 44 37
17.5 32 26
21 23 13
24.5 15
3. Protection ratios between digital systems requiring 7 and 28 MHz channels.

3.5 60 53
10.5 57 53
17.5 42 33
24.5 13 19
31.5 0 14
4. Protection ratios between digital and analogue systems requiring 14 and 28 MHz channels.
Frequency PROTECTION RATIO (dB)
Offset
(MHz) Digital Tx Analogue Tx Digital Tx
↓ ↓ ↓
Digital Rx Digital Rx Analogue Rx
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0 60 60 60 60
7 59 56 60 60
21 37 33 30 30
35 7 15
49 0 5

5. Protection ratios between digital and analogue systems requiring 28 MHz channels.
(MHz)
Analogue Tx Analogue Tx Digital Tx
↓ ↓ ↓
Analogue Rx Digital Rx Analogue Rx
0 60 60 60
28 20 21 30
Notes:
1. Protection ratio for digital systems are based on a 20 km path length and R (Rainfall rate in
mm/hr for 0.01% of the worst month) of 80 mm/hr. For other path lengths and rainfall rates refer
to the appropriate protection ratio correction factors graph on the following page.

THE 15 GHz BAND (14.5 - 15.35 GHz)
RAIN AND MULTI PATH
10
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
PL=5
-30 PL=10
PL=20
R=40 mm/hr
-35 R=60 mm/hr
R=80 mm/hr
-40
0 10 20 30 40 50
Path Length (km)
PL:Percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is less than or

17.7
1
1
18 18.
2
30
fo
.30
5
18.7
18. 5
2
13.75 MHz
27.5 MHz
31
3
18 18. 875
4
.33 332
25 18. 5
1
5
34
18 18 6 18. 625
360
.36 .36
0 0 18.
4
37
1'
18
55 MHz
18. 375
1'
7 8
.38 387
19 19. 75
2'
31 18. 5
2
5
.31 40
5
1010 MHz
19. 5
13.75 MHz
18 18 18. 125
27.5 MHz
32 41
2'
.41 .41
19 19. 875 5 5 18. 5
3' 4'
6
.34 342 428
25 19. 5 18
5'
18. 75
3'
35 44
1'
.44
19 19 19. 625 25 18. 25
6'
37 7 45
3
.37 .37
0 0 19. 0 18 18 18. 625
7'
38 47
4'
.47 .47
19 0 0
55 MHz
19. 375 18. 0
8'
.3 39
8
483
97 19. 75 18
5 41 18. 75
5'
2'
.49 497
19 19 19. 125 75 18. 5
9
42
4
.42 .42 51
5 5 19. 5 18 18 18. 125
6'
438 .52 .52 52
19 19. 75 5 5 18. 5
45 53
10
.45
25 19. 25 18 18. 875
46
3'
7'
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
552

.55
19 19 19. 625
48 5 25 18. 5
.48 .48 566
0 0 19. 0
493 18 25
8'
.58
0
THE 18 GHz BAND (17.7 - 19.7 GHz)
19 19. 75
.50 50 18.
75 19. 75 613
52
4'
75
9'
19 19 19. 125
.53 .53 53
5 5 19. 5
54
10'
19 19. 875
9' 10' 11' 12' 13' 14' 15' 16' 17' 18' 19' 20'
.5 562
See page 2
62
5 19. 5
576
7.5 MHz
5'
25 18.
Channels
19 688
.59 75
0
fo
19
18.7
.62
37
5
August 1998
See page 2
7.5 MHz
19
Channels
.69
87
5
19.7
THE 18 GHz BAND (17.7 - 19.7 GHz)
Sub-Bands 18.61375 - 18.68875 GHz and 19.62375 - 19.69875 GHz

(7.5 MHz Channelling)
18.7
18.61375 18.68875 fo
18.6175 18.6250 18.6325 18.6400 18.6475 18.6550 18.6625 18.6700 18.6775 18.6850
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
7.5MHz
19.62375 19.69875 19.7
19.6275 19.6350 19.6425 19.6500 19.6575 19.6650 19.6725 19.6800 19.6875 19.6950
1' 2' 3' 4' 5' 6' 7' 8' 9' 10'
1010MHz
This band is designated for use by small, medium and high capacity fixed links.
Typical Use : 8/16/34/155 Mbit/s data
Assignment Priority : 55 MHz channels - from highest channel downward;

27.5 MHz channels - from lowest channel upward;
13.75 MHz channels - from channel 10/10’ downward
then from channel 11/11’upward;
7.5 MHz channels - from highest channel downward.
Minimum Path Length : 1 km for systems with bandwidths greater than 27 MHz;
1 km for systems operating in high rainfall areas – see
Note 1;
2 km for all other cases.

Notes:
1. Minimum Path Length criteria may be relaxed to 1km in areas where the rainfall intensity rate
exceeds 80mm/hr for 0.01% of the worst month - see Annex A to Appendix 1 for rainfall
intensity rate contour map.
2. No assignments should be made which would overlap the frequency range 18.8 -19.3 GHz -
See References 1 and 2.
3. The output power of transmitters (measured at the antenna connection) operating in the band
18.6-18.8 GHz is not to exceed +27 dBm (0.5 Watts). It should be noted that multiple
transmitters operating on different RF carrier frequencies individually respecting the above
output power limit can be connected to a single antenna. See Reference 4.
4. Advisory Note BL shall be applied to all assignments overlapping the frequency range 18 to
18.4 GHz. The WRC-03 has invited the ITU-R to conduct sharing analysis pertaining to the
possible expansion of the geostationary meteorological satellite service allocation in this
band. See References 5 and 6.
References
1. Spectrum Planning Policy Document SPP4/96 “Interim Channel Arrangements for the
18 GHz Band - A Discussion Paper”, September 1996, and Addendum 1 to that paper,
"New Interim Arrangements in the 18 GHz Band".
2. RALI MS 3 “Spectrum Embargoes” (Embargo No. 25).

operating in the 18 GHz frequency band”.
4. Article 21.5A, ITU Radio Regulations, Edition of 2001.
5. Resolution 802 (WRC-03) Agenda of the 2007 World Radiocommunication Conference,

Agenda item 1.2.
6. Resolution 746 (WRC-03) Issues dealing with allocations to science services.

THE 18 GHz BAND (17.7 - 19.7 GHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
Protection ratios required between systems operating in the 18 GHz band:
Co-channel or overlapping1 channels 60dB

1st Adjacent Channel 30dB
Notes:
1. The “Co-channel” protection ratio shall apply in cases where any portion of the
interfering and victim channels overlap.
2. The “1st Adjacent Channel” protection ratio shall apply in cases where the interfering
and victim channels do not actually overlap but are immediately adjacent to each other.
3. Protection ratios for digital systems are based on a 10 km path length and R (Rainfall rate
in mm/hr for 0.01% of the worst month) of 80 mm/hr, for other path lengths and rainfall rates
refer to the path length correction factors graph on the following page.

THE 18 GHz BAND (17.7 - 19.7 GHz)
RAIN AND MULTI PATH
25
20
15
10
5
-5
-10
-15
-20
-25
PL=20
R=40 mm/hr
-30 R=60 mm/hr
R=80 mm/hr
-35
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35
Path Length (km)

THE 22 GHz BAND (21.2 - 23.6 GHz)


CHANNEL CENTRE FREQUENCIES (GHz)
Channels 56 MHz Channels 50 MHz Channels 28 MHz Channels 14 MHz Channels 7 MHz Channels
1 1’ 21.868 23.100 21.675 22.875 21.826 23.058 22.015 23.247 22.1235 23.3555
2 2’ 21.924 23.156 21.725 22.925 21.854 23.086 22.029 23.261 22.1305 23.3625
3 3’ 21.980 23.212 21.775 22.975 21.882 23.114 22.043 23.275 22.1375 23.3695
4 4’ 22.036 23.268 21.91 23.142 22.057 23.289 22.1445 23.3765
5 5’ 22.092 23.324 21.938 23.17 22.071 23.303 22.1515 23.3835
6 6’ 21.966 23.198 22.085 23.317 22.1585 23.3905
7 7’ 21.994 23.226 22.099 23.331 22.1655 23.3975
8 8’ 22.022 23.254 22.113 23.345 22.1725 23.4045
9 9’ 22.050 23.282
10 10’ 22.078 23.310
11 11’ 22.106 23.338

THE 22 GHz BAND (21.2 - 23.6 GHz)
This band is designated for use by fixed point-to-point links and Television Outside Broadcast
(TOB) services (See Note 1).
Typical Use : 2/8 Mbit/s data, FM video

Assignment Priority : See Note 2
Notes:
1. (a) The 50 MHz channels 1/1’..3/3’ are designated for TOB services. Licensed TOB
operators may use any of these channels in any area on a co-equal basis with other TOB
operators and are expected to coordinate their use among themselves;
(b) Deleted
2. Assignment priorities for point-to-point services are defined as follows:

14 MHz channels - from the highest channel downward;
3. Special Condition BL shall be applied to all licences for operation on the 50 MHz channels
1-3 (21.65-22.00 GHz band). See Reference 1.
References
1. “Australian Radiofrequency Spectrum Plan”, (Footnote 530A).


THE 22 GHz BAND (21.2 - 23.6 GHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
1. Protection ratios required between digital systems operating on the same channel
arrangements, except for 50 MHz and 56 MHz channels (see table 9 and 10 respectively).
Co channel 60 dB
2. Protection ratios required between digital systems operating on 3.5 and 7 MHz channels.

3.5 MHz → 7 MHz 7 MHz → 3.5 MHz
5.25 55 48
8.75 18 20
12.25 0
3. Protection ratios required between digital systems operating on 7 MHz channels and digital
systems operating on 14 and 28 MHz channels.

Offset Digital Interferer Tx → Digital Victim Rx
(MHz) 7 MHz→14 MHz 14 MHz→7 MHz 7 MHz→28 MHz 28 MHz→7 MHz
10.5 58 49
17.5 32 26 45 35
24.5 15 10 20

28 MHz → 14 MHz 14 MHz → 28 MHz
7 58 60
21 33 35

5. Protection ratios required between digital systems operating on 7 MHz and 56 MHz
channels.

31.5 53 35
38.5 21 15
45.5 11 13
52.5 9 12
59.5 9 10
66.5 9 9
channels.

14 MHz → 56 MHz 56 MHz → 14 MHz
7 65 53
21 64 53
35 49 34
49 15 16
63 10 13
77 9 9
91 9 4
channels.

28 MHz → 56 MHz 56 MHz → 28 MHz
14 65 56
42 45 33
70 15 15
98 10 5
126 9 4
channels.

28 MHz → 50 MHz 50 MHz → 28 MHz
51 17 18
79 7
83 6 8

107 4
9. Protection ratios required between digital systems operating on 50 MHz channel.

50 MHz → 50 MHz
0 60
50 35
100 9
10. Protection ratios required between digital systems operating on 56 MHz channel.

56 MHz → 56 MHz
0 65
56 41
112 15
channels.

50 MHz → 56 MHz 56 MHz → 50 MHz
93 17 12
125 13 8
Notes:
mm/hr for 0.01% of the worst month) of 80 mm/hr, for other path lengths and rainfall rates
refer to the appropriate path length correction factors graph on the following page.

THE 22 GHz BAND (21.2 - 23.6 GHz)
RAIN FADE
40
30
20
10
-10
-20
R=40 mm/hr
R=60 mm/hr
R=80 mm/hr
-30
0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20
Path Length (km)

THE 28 GHz BAND (27.5 – 29.5 GHz)

28 MHz Channels 56 MHz Channels 112 MHz Channels
1 1’ 28.1225 29.1305 1 1’ 28.1365 29.1445 1 1’ 28.1645 29.1725
2 2’ 28.1505 29.1585
3 3’ 28.1785 29.1865 2 2’ 28.1925 29.2005
4 4’ 28.2065 29.2145
5 5’ 28.2345 29.2425 3 3’ 28.2485 29.2565 2 2’ 28.2765 29.2845
6 6’ 28.2625 29.2705
7 7’ 28.2905 29.2985 4 4’ 28.3045 29.3125
8 8’ 28.3185 29.3265
9 9’ 28.3465 29.3545 5 5’ 28.3605 29.3685 3 3’ 28.3885 29.3965
10 10’ 28.3745 29.3825
11 11’ 28.4025 29.4105 6 6’ 28.4165 29.4245
12 12’ 28.4305 29.4385
FX 3 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions September 2019

THE 28 GHz BAND (27.5 – 29.5 GHz)
Effective 23 September 2019, no new assignments may be made in this band

THE 28 GHz BAND (27.5 – 29.5 GHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
Protection ratios required between digital systems operating in various channel bandwidths (with
offset between centre frequencies ∆f) are provided in the tables below
1. Protection ratios required for 28 MHz channels.
Frequency Offset
28 MHz → 28 MHz 56 MHz → 28 MHz 112 MHz → 28 MHz
(MHz)
0 64
14 61 58
28 35
42 34 57
56 14
70 17 34
98 10 17
126 9 14
154 12
184 7
210 6
Frequency Offset
(MHz)
0 64
14 64
28 61
42 38
56 35
70 14
84 34
98 9
112 14
126 9
140 17

Frequency Offset
(MHz)
0 64
14 65
28 64
42 63
70 43
84 38
98 13
112 35
126 9
140 14
154 9
196 9
224 14
Notes:
mm/hr for 0.01% of the worst month) of 80 mm/hr using Recommendation ITU-R P.530-15,
Section 2.4 as outlined in spectrum planning report SPP 2014/07. For other path lengths and
rainfall rates refer to the appropriate path length correction factors graph on the following
page, these are calculated in accordance with RALI FX 3 Appendix 4, section 4.1.3.

THE 28 GHz BAND (27.5 – 29.5 GHz)
RAIN FADE
60
50
40
30
20
10
-10
-20
R=40 mm/hr
R=60 mm/hr
R=80 mm/hr
-30
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
P ath Length (km)

THE 38 GHz BAND (37 - 39.5 GHz)
Channel centre frequencies are listed on the next page.

CHANNELLING

Channels 28 MHz Channels 56 MHz Channels 112 MHz Channels
1 1’ 37.912 39.172 37.982 39.242 37.562 38.822
2 2’ 37.940 39.200 38.038 39.298 37.674 38.934
3 3’ 37.968 39.228 38.094 39.354 37.786 39.046
4 4’ 37.996 39.256 38.150 39.410 37.898 39.158
5 5’ 38.024 39.284 38.010 39.270
6 6’ 38.052 39.312 38.122 39.382
7 7’ 38.080 39.340
8 8’ 38.108 39.368
9 9’ 38.136 39.396
10 10’ 38.164 39.424
This band is designated for use by short haul medium-high capacity fixed point-to-point services.
Typical Use : not specified

Assignment Priority : See Notes 1 & 2.
Note:
28 MHz channels – from channel 10/10’ downwards

56 MHz channels – from channel 4/4’ downwards
112 MHz channels - from the lowest channel upwards
2. 7 MHz and 14 MHz channel raster’s have been retired. No new assignments are to be made;
existing services may continue to operate and must be afforded protection from proposed new
services.
Reference


PROTECTION RATIOS
Arrangements (7, 14, 28, 56, 112 MHz).
7, 14 or 28 MHz 56 and 112 MHz

channels channels
Co channel 60 dB 70 dB
1st adjacent channel 30 dB 35 dB
2nd adjacent channel 0 dB 0 dB

7 MHz → 112 MHz 112 MHz → 7 MHz
3.5 70 49
10.5 70 49
17.5 70 49
24.3 70 49
31.5 69 49
38.5 68 49
45.5 67 49
52.5 64 44
59.5 55 33
66.5 35 15
73.5 35 14
80.5 – 101.5 35 13
108.5 – 143.5 35 12
150.5 – 164.5 35 11

3. Protection ratios from 14 and 28 MHz towards other channel arrangements.

(MHz)
14 MHz 14 MHz 14 MHz 28 MHz 28 MHz 28 MHz
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0
7 70
14 69 70
21 36 70 37
35 15 69 19
42 45 67
49 66
63 52
70 21 49
77 27
91 24 27
98 21 24
105 24 27
119 24 27
126 21 24
133 24 27
147 27
154 24
161 27

4. Protection ratios from 56 and 112 MHz towards other channel arrangements.

(MHz)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
0
7 57 54
14 60 57
21 54
28 69 66
35 33 54
42 31 56
49 16 52
63 14 34
70 15 32
77 11 16
84 42 38
91 11 14
98 13 16
105 11 13
119 11 12
126 13 14
133 11 11
140 25 22
147 9
154 11
161 8
Notes:
mm/hr for 0.01% of the worst month) of 80 mm/hr. For other path lengths and rainfall rates
refer to the appropriate protection ratio correction factors graph on the following page.

THE 38 GHz BAND (37 -39.5 GHz)
RAIN FADE
20
15
10
5
-5
-10
-15
R=40 mm/hr
R=60 mm/hr
R=80 mm/hr
-20
-25
0.0 0.5 1.0 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 4.5 5.0 5.5
Path Length (km)


THE 49 GHz BAND (49.2-49.95 GHz)
fo
49.20 49.575 49.95
49.24 49.28 49.32 49.36 49.40 49.74 49.78 49.82 49.86 49.90
1 2 3 4 5 1' 2' 3' 4' 5'
40 MHz
500 MHz
This band is designated for use by temporary microwave links.
Typical Use : temporary digital or video links to provide

communications for short term events
eg. teleconferencing, outside broadcast, etc.
Notes:
1. Frequency assignments in this band are not exclusive, ie the same channels may be assigned
to a number of licensees for use in the same geographic area. Due to the low transmit power,
high antenna gain and short transmission paths used there is a low probability of interference
between licensees. Where licensees are likely to be co-located, eg. providing video coverage
of a particular event, coordination between licensees is recommended. See Reference 1.
2. This is an interim channel arrangement which may be subject to review. Special Condition
BL shall be applied to all licences.
Reference
1. ACA File X93-0193, “Frequency Band Usage 49 GHz Band”.

THE 50 GHz BAND (50.4 - 51.15 GHz)
fo
50.4 50.775 51.15
4 8 2 6 0 4 8 2 6 0
.4 .4 .5 .5 .6 .9 .9 .0 .0 .1
50 50 50 50 50 50 50 51 51 51
1 2 3 4 5 1' 2' 3' 4' 5'
40 MHz
500 MHz
This band is designated for use by fixed point-to-point links.
Typical Use : 2/8 Mbit/s data, FM video.
Assignment Priority : from lowest upward, unless a specific channel is

requested.
Notes:
1. For allocation of channels see Reference 1.
2. This is an interim channel arrangement which may be subject to review. Special Condition
BL shall be applied to all licences.
Reference
1. ACA File R93-1149, “Frequency Band Usage 15 GHz and Above”.

THE 50 GHz BAND (50.4 - 51.15 GHz)
PROTECTION RATIOS
arrangements.
Co channel 60 dB
Notes:
mm/hr for 0.01% of the worst month) of 80 mm/hr. For other path lengths and rainfall rates
refer to the appropriate protection ratio correction factors graph on the following page.

THE 50 GHz BAND (50.4 - 51.15 GHz)
RAIN FADE
20
15
10
0
-5
-10
-15
-20
R=40 mm/hr
R=60 mm/hr
R=80 mm/hr
-25
-30
0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Path Length (km)


ANNEX A to APPENDIX 1: Propagation Related Statistical
Information
Appendix 1 “RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions” specifies

protection ratio values, for use under the “Basic Method of Frequency
Coordination” 1, for each microwave fixed services band. However, in the case of
digital systems these protection ratios are normalised for a particular path length and
geoclimatic zone.
Accordingly, appropriate corrections must be applied to the (Appendix 1) tabulated

protection ratio values in order to account for the victim system actual path length and
geographic location, with specific reference to worst month multipath fading (pL) and
average annual rain intensity (R) statistics, where:
• “pL” is the percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest
100 m of the atmosphere is less than –100 N units/km; and
• “R” is the rainfall rate (mm/hr) exceeded for 0.01% of the average year.
Pending the development of more detailed geoclimatic statistical data for frequency
coordination purposes, the average year multipath fading and rainfall contour maps
provided in this annex are to be used:
• Figure 1 provides contour maps 2, for estimating pL values in Australia. The month
that has the highest value of pL (at the fixed service link geographic location)
should be chosen from the four seasonally representative months of February,
May, August and November; and
• Figure 2 defines a rain intensity (mm/h) map 3 for Australia, the value R at the fixed
service link geographic location should be selected.
The dominant parameter (ie. either multipath fading or rain attenuation) is then used
(together with victim system path length) to determine the appropriate correction
values from the relevant (Appendix 1) Protection Ratio Correction Factor graph.
Note: Further guidance regarding propagation prediction methods is detailed in

Appendix 4 “Fixed Service Propagation Modelling”.
1
As detailed in Part 4 “Frequency Coordination” of RALI FX 3.
2
Based on Recommendation P.453 “The Radio Refractive Index: its formula and Refractivity Data”
3
Based on Recommendation P.837-3 “Characteristics of Precipitation for Propagation Modelling”.
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 1 - Propagation Related Statistical Information August 1998

2
Figure 1. Multipath fading (PL) statistical contour maps
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 1 - Propagation Related Statistical Information June 2001

3
30
35
60
100
50
60
35
50
40
80
30
25
30
40
100
20
30
100
80
50
20
25
100
30
20
50
60
30
80
30
20
100
Figure 2. Rain Intensity R (mm/h) exceeded for 0.01% of the average year for
Australia
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 1 - Propagation Related Statistical Information June 2001

APPENDIX 2: Interference Mechanisms and Performance Criteria
Interference mechanisms and performance criteria for microwave fixed services are
under review. In the interim, enquiries related to these matters may be referred to the
Spectrum Planning Team, Spectrum Planning and Standards Group, ACA.
FX 3 Appendix 2 - Interference Mechanisms and Performance Criteria August 1998

APPENDIX 3: Fixed Service Emission Criteria
Introduction
The criteria for fixed service emissions are yet to be reviewed by ACMA, pending the
outcome of current ITU-R studies on bandwidth and unwanted emissions for digital
fixed services. In the meantime, interim guidelines are provided in Section 2 below.
Further inquiries on these matters can be referred to the Spectrum Planning Team,
ACMA.
It is anticipated the more detailed criteria may be available towards the end of 2000.
These criteria are likely to include:
• guidelines from ITU Recommendation F.1191 for digital fixed services, which
remove the need for spectrum masks and simply use the occupied bandwidth
(containing 99% of total mean power) as the limiting factor for digital fixed
service emissions; and
• guidance on methods for measuring the occupied bandwidth.
Interim Guidelines
Until information from a revised ITU Recommendation F.1191 (and other related ITU
Recommendations also under revision) is able to be included in this RALI, the
following emission criteria should be used.
Out-of-band Emissions - Digital Fixed Services

Consistent with ITU Rec. F.1191, out-of-band emissions are defined as: "Emission on
a frequency or frequencies immediately outside the necessary bandwidth which
results from the modulation process, but excluding spurious emissions".
Transmitter equipment used for Digital Fixed Services should meet either:
a) emissions criteria in a relevant ETSI 1 standard. See Table 1 for a list of relevant
standards;
b) FCC 2 emissions criteria, see Part 101.111 of the FCC Rules; or
c) if a relevant ETSI standard is not available or the FCC criteria is not appropriate,
the RF spectrum mask shown in Figure 1 may be used. In some cases this mask
may be more stringent than the emission criteria specified by ETSI or the FCC.
Spurious Emissions - All Fixed Services

Consistent with ITU Rec. SM.329, spurious emissions are defined as: "Emission on a
frequency or frequencies which are outside the necessary bandwidth and the level of
which may be reduced without affecting the corresponding transmission of
information. Spurious emissions include harmonic emissions, parasitic emissions,
intermodulation products and frequency conversion products but exclude out-of-band
emissions".
1
ETSI is the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (see www.etsi.org)
2
FCC is the Federal Communications Commission (USA)
FX 3 Appendix 3 - Fixed Service Emission Criteria October 2014

In line with the 'Category A' limits from ITU Recommendation SM.329-7 "Spurious
Emissions", the maximum permitted spurious emission level is -13 dBm (power
supplied to the antenna), which should be measured in a 1 MHz reference bandwidth.
ITU Recommendation SM.329 also provides guidance on measurement methods.
ETSI EN 302 217 provides information on characteristsics digital point-to-point

equipment and rationalises a large number of previous ETSI standards. 3
0 Recommended
Spectrum Analyser Settings
Resolution Bandwidth = 100 kHz

-10 Video Bandwidth = 0.3 kHz
Transmitter Relative Power (dB)
-20
-30
-40
Channel
Edge
(50%)
-50
-60
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180
Frequency from actual centre frequency, relative to channel width (%)
Figure 1: RF Spectrum Mask
• This mask is normalised in frequency to the channel width.

• The 0 dB level shown on the spectrum mask relates to the power spectral density of the actual
centre frequency.
• This mask has been developed after consideration of FCC criteria and ETSI criteria (from Table 1).
The mask shown is similar to the RF spectrum mask in EN 301 216 (30 MHz chan., class 1)
3
For further information see ETSI EN 302-217-1
FX 3 Appendix 3 - Fixed Service Emission Criteria October 2014

APPENDIX 4 : Fixed service propagation modelling
Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION.................................................................................................... 1
2. CALCULATING THE BASIC TRANSMISSION LOSS (LBF) .......................... 2
3. MODELLING TERRAIN DEPENDENT LOSSES (LM) .................................... 2

3.1 SMOOTH EARTH ........................................................................................................ 3
3.2 SINGLE KNIFE-EDGE .................................................................................................. 4
3.3 MULTIPLE OBSTACLES .............................................................................................. 4
4. DETAILED FIXED SERVICE PROPAGATION PREDICTION MODELS... 5
4.1 WANTED SIGNAL PATH PROPAGATION MECHANISMS ................................................. 6
4.1.1 Prediction of multi-path fading - initial planning method ................................ 7
4.1.2 Prediction of multi-path fading - detailed link design method ......................... 8
4.1.3 Prediction of attenuation due to rain .............................................................. 10
4.2 INTERFERENCE PATH PROPAGATION MECHANISMS .................................................. 11
4.2.1 LOS propagation (including short-term effects) ............................................. 12
4.2.2 LOS with diffraction losses ............................................................................. 12
4.2.3 Clutter losses ................................................................................................... 13
1. Introduction
The basic method of frequency coordination, detailed under Part 4 of RALI FX 3,
requires, in the first instance, the quantification of the basic free-space loss over the
wanted and the unwanted signal paths. In order to facilitate a more rigorous
assessment of the overall transmission loss, detailed path analysis and the application
of appropriate propagation models is often necessary.
This appendix extends the simple transmission loss analysis outlined under the basic
method of frequency coordination, through the addition of diffraction models suitable
for estimating terrain dependent path losses over the wanted and unwanted signal
paths. Guidance is also provided regarding the application of the more commonly
used ITU-R terrestrial service propagation prediction methods incorporating statistical
analyses based on system specific criteria.
Note: The onus is on the assigner to apply 1 the most appropriate propagation model/s
for the given interference environment also noting that the ITU-R prediction models
outlined in this document are subject to ongoing development.
1
All of the fixed service propagation models described in this document may be usefully incorporated
as computer program algorithms (integrated with terrain and assignment databases), to facilitate less
labour intensive and more efficient frequency assignment practices.
FX 3 Appendix 4 - Fixed Service Propagation Modelling October 1998

2
2. Calculating the basic transmission loss (Lbf)

Recalling that the total transmission loss (Lb) between two ideal antennas, consists of:
• a (time invariant) basic free space loss (Lbf); and

• additional attenuation due to terrain, rain and other physical attributes associated
with a particular propagation path (Lm).
The total transmission loss is then given by:
Lb = Lbf + Lm (dB)
where:
Lbf = 32.4 + 20log f + 20log d (dB)
where: f - frequency (MHz); and

d - distance (km).
In cases where an initial coordination assessment using the basic free-space

attenuation model fails to meet the specified interference management criteria, then
more complex propagation analyses may be invoked in order to more accurately
characterise the Lm component of the total transmission loss. Subsequent choice of
appropriate propagation model/s may be critical in determining the outcome of
detailed coordination.
3. Modelling terrain dependent losses (Lm)

A more detailed analysis of the overall transmission loss must include consideration
of additional (ie. above free-space) attenuation due to the effects of terrain and
diffraction in particular. Thus under the basic method of frequency coordination:
Lm ≅ Ld
where: Ld - attenuation due to diffraction (dB).
The attenuation due to diffraction may be estimated by the propagation models, based
on the application of ITU-R Recommendation P.526-4 “Propagation by diffraction”,
described in the following sub-sections. The models are valid for systems operating
above about 1 GHz and consider attenuation due to diffraction over:
• a “smooth-earth” propagation path;

• a single knife-edge obstacle; and
• multiple obstacles.
The selection of the appropriate diffraction model(s) is determined by an analysis of

the relevant path profile(s). For an initial analysis and under the basic method of

3
coordination, critical path clearance over the wanted signal path is normally assumed
since no additional interference protection is mandated for fixed service systems
operating over obstructed paths. Propagation models used for link planning purposes
typically specify results based on a median signal level (ie. the level exceeded for
50% of the time). For interference calculation purposes, more stringent criteria are
normally applied and, for the basic method of frequency coordination, long term
(20%) and short term (0.01%) criteria are adopted.
Accordingly, for the path profile analysis, the following k-factors 2 are normally
applied:
• k = 4/3 under the median link planning “standard atmosphere” criteria (50%);
• k=3 under the long term “annual” interference criteria (20%); and
• k = 20 under the short term “worst month 3“ interference criteria (0.01%)
For terrain modelling and path analyses based on digitised data, an elevation model at
least equivalent to or better than the ACA's RadDEM (9 second data) is to be used.
3.1 Smooth Earth

The standard method for calculating the transmission loss due to diffraction over a
smooth-earth is defined as follows:
Ld = F(X) + G(Y1) + G(Y2) (dB)
where: X - normalised length of the path;
d
X = 2.2
3 f
3 a e2
Y1, Y2 - normalised antenna heights;
2 h
Y = 0.0096 3
f
3 ae
ae - equivalent Earth radius, equal to the product ka

where: a - the actual Earth radius (6370km); and
k - the applicable k-factor 4.
h - antenna height (m);
d - path length (km); and
f - frequency (MHz).
the distance term is given by:
2
Defined in Recommendation P.310-9 as the ratio of the effective Earth radius to the actual Earth
radius and related to the vertical refractivity gradient dn/dh (∆N, see also Recommendation P.453-5).
3
See Recommendation P.581-2 “The concept of Worst Month”.
4
Note: As k → ∞ the spherical earth diffraction model is no longer valid and Ld = 0.

4
F(X) = 11 + 10 log(X) - 17.6X
with the height gain term:
. - 5 log(Y - 1.1) - 8
17.6 Y − 11 for Y>2
G(Y) ≅ {
3
20 log(Y + 0.1Y ) for Y≤2
3.2 Single knife-edge

The standard method for calculating the transmission loss due to diffraction over a
single knife-edge obstacle is defined as follows:
. ) 2 + 1 + v - 0.1)
Ld = 6.9 + 20log( (v − 01 (dB)
fd
where: v=h( )
150d 1d 2
h - height (m) of the obstacle relative to a straight line joining the path ends;
d1, d2 - distance (km) of the two ends of the path from the top of the obstacle;
d - path length (km); and
f - frequency (GHz).
3.3 Multiple obstacles

The single obstacle diffraction model may be extended to account for multiple
obstacles. Path analysis and calculation of the attenuation due to diffraction over
multiple obstacles may be determined using the “stretched string analysis” method
detailed in ITU-R Recommendation P.526.
This concludes the outline of basic transmission loss calculation and propagation
modelling methodologies intended to be incorporated as part of the basic method of
frequency coordination. The following sections provide an overview of the
commonly used ITU-R fixed service propagation prediction procedures, which take
account of the statistical nature of terrestrial radiowave propagation and which can be
applied under particular instances of detailed coordination.

5
4. Detailed fixed service propagation prediction models

The transmission loss calculation procedures incorporated under the basic method of
frequency coordination represent a deterministic approach; free-space loss is constant
in time and diffraction loss values are calculated for a particular 'k' value of effective
Earth radius. In the real world, the k-factor varies with time and location in
accordance with complex physical interactions involving the refractivity gradient
(dn/dh) in the lowest part of the atmosphere and other mechanisms, as detailed in the
propagation “P series” of ITU Recommendations.
An important objective in planning terrestrial microwave link systems is to ensure that

outages resulting from these variations are extremely rare events, thus system fade
margins, linked to error performance and availability objectives, of the appropriate
order are implemented to assure that this is so. Accordingly, in order to take account
of the statistical nature of radiowave propagation, the application of appropriate
propagation prediction models is necessary.
Performance prediction (related to propagation effects) principally depends upon the

assessment of two main propagation mechanisms; multi-path fading and/or
attenuation due to rain. Multi-path fading typically gives rise to short outages and
thus has the most impact on error performance. For the purpose of modelling multi-
path fading, propagation prediction methods have been derived which estimate the
probability of single-frequency fading 5. Rain attenuation events typically give rise to
outage durations greater than 10 seconds, therefore directly influencing availability of
systems operating in the bands above about 10 GHz. The prediction of rain outages is
possible through application of rainfall intensity statistics to modelling methods for
rain attenuation.
The following ITU-R recommendations represent the principal ITU-R models used
for fixed service propagation modelling:
• Recommendation P.530-6 “ Propagation data and Prediction Methods required

for the design of Terrestrial Line-of-Sight Systems” as typically utilised for link
planning purposes; and
• Recommendation P.452-7 “Prediction Procedure for the Evaluation of Microwave
Interference between stations on the Surface of the Earth at frequencies above
about 0.7 GHz”, provides methodologies specifically intended for use on
interference paths.
Although these models address propagation mechanisms for the wanted signal and the
interference path independently, the prediction methods are not exclusive to either
path type. The use of these particular ITU-R prediction methods is not mandated and,
in cases where a departure from these models can be justified, other (relevant)
prediction methods may be applied.
An outline of the application of prediction methods based on the above

recommendations, for frequency coordination purposes, is provided in the following
5
Wideband systems may also suffer frequency selective fading, not addressed in these models.

6
sections. However, the emphasis in this document is to provide guidance regarding

the application of these models in the Australian context, rather than the verbatim
reproduction of detailed methodologies. Accordingly, for detailed application,
reference must be made to the relevant source recommendations.
4.1 Wanted signal path propagation mechanisms

The wanted signal for microwave fixed services can be modelled using the
performance prediction methods presented in ITU-R Recommendation P.530-6, for
the following propagation mechanisms:
• diffraction fading due to obstruction or partial obstruction of the path, as already

discussed in Section 3 of this Appendix;
• attenuation due to atmospheric gases;
• attenuation due to variation of the angle-of-arrival/launch; and
• fading due to multi-path, beam spreading, scintillation and attenuation due to rain.
For frequency coordination purposes, only the dominant multi-path fading (and
related mechanisms) and rain outage mechanisms are considered in this overview.
The following subsections outline two methodologies, (Section 4.1.1 “an initial
planning method” and Section 4.1.2 “detailed link design method”, as detailed in
Recommendation P.530-6) suitable for estimating the effects of multipath fading and
statistical algorithms (Section 4.2.3) for evaluating rain fade attenuation.
The prediction of the remaining propagation mechanisms (including multipath

enhancement modes) as also detailed in Recommendation P.530-6 are part of the
detailed link design process and are not considered here.
Note: The prediction methods presented in Sections 4.1.1 and 4.1.2 model single
frequency fading (ie. “flat fade margin”) and do not account for dispersive effects
which may be a concern in detailed planning for wideband (ie. 34/140/155 Mb/s)
systems. However, the methods may be considered adequate for frequency
coordination purposes and are valid for fade depths greater than approximately 15 dB
or the value exceeded for 0.1% of the worst month, whichever is the greater.

7
4.1.1 Prediction of multi-path fading - initial planning method

For the path location in question, estimate the geoclimatic factor K for the average
worst month from pL 6 and the following empirical relationships, derived for Australia:
Overland links for which the lower of the transmitting and

K = 10-6.5 pL1.5 receiving antennas is less than 700 m above mean sea
level;

K = 10-7.1 pL1.5 receiving antennas is higher than 700 m above mean sea
level;
Links over medium-sized bodies of water, coastal areas

K = 10-5.9 pL1.5 beside such bodies of water, or regions of many lakes; and
Links over large bodies of water, or coastal areas beside

K = 10-5.5 pL1.5 such bodies of water.
Whilst in most cases selecting the correct empirical relationship “K” is

straightforward, any ambiguity can be resolved by referring to the notes included in
ITU-R Recommendation P.530-6, which provide further guidance regarding the
parameters and terminology used in the above-listed relationship criteria.
If the antenna heights are known, calculate the magnitude of the path inclination (| εp |)
from:
1
εp = hr - he (mrad)
d
where: d - path length (km); and

he, hr - transmit and receive antenna height respectively (metres above sea
level or some other reference height).
The fade depth (A) that is exceeded for a percentage of time (pw) in the average worst
month is:
A = 10log(K d 3.6f 0.89 (1 + εp) -1.4) - 10log pw (dB)
where: f is frequency (GHz).
For the prediction of average year instead of average worst month exceedence
percentages, refer to P.530-6 § 2.3.5. and ITU-R Recommendation PN.841 7.
6
pL (percentage of time that the average refractivity gradient in the lowest 100 m of the atmosphere is
less than –100 N units/km) refractivity gradient contour maps are provided in Figure 1, Annex A to
Appendix 1 of RALI FX 3.
7
ITU-R Recommendation P.841 “Conversion of annual statistics to worst-month statistics”.

8
4.1.2 Prediction of multi-path fading - detailed link design method

The detailed link design method is an extension of the initial planning method and it
accounts for the path profile. The geoclimatic factor K is estimated using the
following empirical relationships:

K = 10-5.4 pL1.5 receiving antennas is less than 700 m above mean sea
level;

K = 10-6.0 pL1.5 receiving antennas is higher than 700 m above mean sea
level;
Links over medium-sized bodies of water, coastal areas

K = 10-4.8 pL1.5 beside such bodies of water, or regions of many lakes; and
Links over large bodies of water, or coastal areas beside

K = 10-4.4 pL1.5 such bodies of water.
The path inclination is calculated as described in the initial planning method. From
the profile of the terrain along the path, obtain the terrain heights h at intervals of
1.0 km, beginning 1.0 km from one terminal and ending 1-2 km from the other. Using
these heights, carry out a linear regression with the “method of least squares” to
obtain the linear equation of the “average” profile:
h(x) = a0 x + a1
where x is the distance along the path. The regression coefficients can be calculated
from the relations:
 
∑ xh – ∑ x ∑ h / n
n  n n 
a0 =
– ∑ x / n
2
∑ x2
n n 
a1 = ∑ h – a0 ∑ x /n
n n 
where n is the number of profile height samples.
Calculate h(0) and h(d), the heights of the average profile at the ends of the path, and
the heights of the antennas above the average path profile:
h1 = he - h(0)
h2 = hr - h(d)

9
Calculate the “average” grazing angle ϕ corresponding to a 4/3 Earth radius model
(i.e. ae = 8 500 km) (Refer to Recommendation ITU-R P.834):
h1 + h2 
2 
ϕ = d  1 – m (1 + b ) 
where:
d2
m =
4 ae (h1 + h2 )
c = | h1 – h2 | / ( h1 + h2 )
m + 1 π 1  3c 3m 
b = 2 cos  3 + arc cos  2 
3m  3  (m + 1)3  
In calculation of the coefficients m and c, the variables ae, d, h1 and h2 must be in the
same units. The grazing angle ϕ will be in the desired units of milliradians if h1 and h2
are in metres and d in kilometres.
The fade depth (A) that is exceeded for a percentage of time pw in the average worst
month is:
A = 10log(K d 3.3f 0.93 (1 + εp) -1.1ϕ-1.2) - 10log pw (dB)
where: f is frequency (GHz).

10
4.1.3 Prediction of attenuation due to rain

The specific attenuation due to rain, as based on ITU-R Recommendation P.838
“Specific Attenuation Model for Rain for use in Prediction Methods” is given by:
γR = kRα (dB/km)
where: R - rainfall intensity 8 (mm/hr); and

k, α - frequency dependant coefficients.
The coefficients k and α for linear (H - horizontal, V - vertical) and circular

polarisation can be calculated from the following equations:
k = 0.5 [kH + kV + (kH - kV) cos2θ cos(2τ)]
α = 1 [kHαH + kVαV + (kHαH - kVαV) cos2θ cos(2τ)]

2k
where: kH, αH , kV, αV - regression coefficients (as specified in Table 1) for

estimating specific attenuation;
θ - path elevation angle; and
τ - polarisation tilt angle relative to the horizontal (τ = 45° for circular).
Frequency kH kV αH αV
(GHz)
1 0.0000387 0.0000352 0.912 0.880

2 0.000154 0.000138 0.963 0.923
4 0.000650 0.000591 1.121 1.075
6 0.00175 0.00155 1.308 1.265
7 0.00301 0.00265 1.332 1.312
8 0.00454 0.00395 1.327 1.310
10 0.0101 0.00887 1.276 1.264
12 0.0188 0.0168 1.217 1.200
15 0.0367 0.0335 1.154 1.128
20 0.0751 0.0691 1.099 1.065
25 0.124 0.113 1.061 1.030
30 0.187 0.167 1.021 1.000
35 0.263 0.233 0.979 0.963
40 0.350 0.310 0.939 0.929
45 0.442 0.393 0.903 0.897
50 0.536 0.479 0.873 0.868
Table 1. Regression coefficients for estimating specific attenuation
8
The rainfall intensity for 0.01% of the time can be derived from the rain climate region map in Figure
2, Annex A to Appendix 1, for rainfall intensities at other percentages refer to ITU-R Recommendation
P.838.

11
For any given path the attenuation due to rain is calculated for an effective path
length, which accounts for the distribution of the rain intensity rate. The attenuation
(A) due to rain, exceeded for 0.01% of the worst month is:
d
A = γR ( ) (dB)
d
1+
d0
where: d - path length (km); and
d0 = 35e ( −0.015R0.01 )
The attenuation (Ap) due to rain, exceeded for p% (0.001 < p < 1) of the worst month
is:
Ap = 0.12 p − (0.546 + 0.043 log 10 p) (dB)
4.2 Interference path propagation mechanisms

Interference path transmission losses for microwave fixed service links, including
situations where interference levels rise for short periods of time (p%) due to
propagation enhancement on the interference path, can be modelled using the
prediction models defined in ITU-R Recommendation P.452-7 9, for the following
propagation mechanisms:
• line-of-sight (including multi-path and focussing effects and gaseous absorption);

• line-of-sight with sub-path diffraction;
• diffraction due to clutter;
• tropospheric scatter; and
• ducting and other anomalous propagation modes.
Note: The troposcatter and the above-mentioned “anomalous” mode models are not
considered here, as interference contribution through these modes to the homogeneous
fixed service are not considered significant. However, they may be of significance
when considering interference to particularly sensitive systems such as Earth stations
of the space services.
Two basic types of interference path are considered when modelling transmission
losses for a terrestrial propagation path. These demonstrate either a first Fresnel zone
clearance or intrusion into the first Fresnel zone. For a terrestrial path with first
Fresnel zone clearance, line-of-sight and clutter loss are the applicable propagation
models. The corresponding predicted transmission loss is:
9
Computer programs associated with the prediction procedures described in this Recommendation are
available from the ITU.

12
Lb (p) = Lb0 (p) + Aht + Ahr (dB)
where: Lb0 (p) - predicted basic transmission loss not exceeded for p% of time given
by the LOS model; and
Aht, Ahr - appropriate additional losses due to height-gain effects in local
clutter.
For a terrestrial path with (obstacle) intrusion into the first Fresnel zone, the above-
mentioned models apply with the addition of a diffraction model. The predicted
transmission loss is then:
Lb (p) = Lb0 (p) + Lds (p) + Aht + Ahr (dB)
where: Lds (p) - prediction for p% of the time given by the sub-path diffraction loss
element of the diffraction model.
4.2.1 LOS propagation (including short-term effects)

The basic transmission loss Lb0 ( p) not exceeded for time percentage, p %, due to
line-of-sight propagation is given by:
Lb0 (p) = 92.5 + 20log f + 20log d + Es(p) + Ag (dB)
where: Es ( p) - correction for multipath and focusing effects:
Es (p) = -9.617 (1 - e -d / 10) (dB) for 0.01 % of the time
Es (p) = -1.035 (1 - e -d / 10) (dB) for 20 % of the time
Total gaseous (atmospheric) absorption is only considered significant at frequencies

above approximately 10 GHz. The total gaseous absorption is:
Ag = [γo + γw (ρ) ] d (dB)
where:
γo, γw (ρ) - specific attenuation due to dry air and water vapour, respectively, and are
found from the equations in Recommendation ITU-R P.676; and
ρ: water vapour density:
ρ = 7.5 + 2.5 ω (g/m3)
ω: fraction of the total path over water.
4.2.2 LOS with diffraction losses

The excess loss due to diffraction may be calculated using a diffraction
methodology 10, assuming the effective Earth radius to be time-dependant due to the
10
Derived from ITU-R Recommendation P.526-4.

13
changes in bulk atmospheric radio refractivity lapse rate. ITU-R Recommendation

P.452-7 §4.3 describes this time-dependant sub-path refraction loss model.
4.2.3 Clutter losses

The presence of clutter (buildings and vegetation) in the vicinity of the transmit and
receive antennas can cause additional transmission losses, Aht and Ahr. These losses
are dependant upon the height of the clutter. Clutter losses may be calculated using
the methodologies described in ITU-R Recommendation P.452-7 §4.6 by a height-
gain model which is normalised to the nominal height of the clutter.

APPENDIX 5: Geostationary Satellite Orbit Avoidance
Table of Contents
1. INTRODUCTION ..................................................................................................... 1
2. GSO AVOIDANCE NECESSARY TO PROTECT SPACE STATION

RECEIVERS. ................................................................................................................. 1
2.1 ORBIT AVOIDANCE CRITERIA FOR SPECIFIC FREQUENCY BANDS ............................... 2
2.2 DEFAULT ORBIT AVOIDANCE CRITERIA .................................................................... 3
3. GSO AVOIDANCE NECESSARY TO PROTECT THE FIXED SERVICE .......... 3
1. Introduction
As detailed in the Spectrum Plan 1, most of the frequency bands used by the fixed
service (FS) are shared with other radiocommunication services, including
geostationary orbit (GSO) space radiocommunication services. Annex A to this
appendix provides a summary of fixed service bands which currently share with GSO
space services. In order to facilitate spectrum sharing between the terrestrial fixed
service and (existing and future) GSO based space radiocommunication services, it is
necessary to limit the EIRP of fixed service systems in the direction of the GSO to
avoid long term interference to sensitive space station receivers. Conversely, in some
situations where the azimuth of a receiving station in the fixed service constitutes a
look angle to a co-frequency transmitting station in the GSO, the fixed service may be
subject to significant long-term interference, depending upon the sensitivity of the FS
receiver and the satellite system power flux density at the receiver location.
2. GSO avoidance necessary to protect space station receivers.

In accordance with International Radio Regulation S21.3, the maximum EIRP of a
station in the fixed service shall not exceed 55 dBW. This limit is reduced, in
accordance with the criteria outlined in the following tables, for cases where the fixed
service antenna main beam illuminates the GSO. Accordingly, for those fixed
services employing maximum EIRP in excess of the relevant values,
radiocommunication sites should be selected such that the direction of maximum
radiation of the antenna is separated from the GSO by at least the specified minimum
angular separation.
1
“Australian Radiofrequency Spectrum Plan, January 1997”.
FX 3 Appendix 5 - Geostationary Satellite Orbit Avoidance August 1998

2
2.1 Orbit Avoidance Criteria for specific frequency bands
Band EIRP limit Minimum Separation Angle

(GHz) (dBW) (degrees)
2.025-2.110 +8 (Note 1) 2°
2.200-2.290 +8 (Note 1) 2°
25.25-27.50 +24 (Note 1) 1.5°
Table 1. Orbit avoidance for specific frequency bands.
Note 1: The orbit avoidance criteria specified in Table 1 for the bands
2025-2110 MHz, 2200-2290 MHz and 25.25-27.5 GHz, are based on ITU-R
Recommendations F.1247 2 and F.1249 3 and are intended to protect Data Relay
Satellites (DRS) operating in specific GSO locations from the emissions of terrestrial
fixed services which may illuminate these orbital positions. As far as practicable, the
fixed service station EIRP in the direction of the given orbital positions should not
exceed the values in Table 1. Orbital positions visible from Australian mainland
longitudes and identified (in Recommendation ITU-R SA.1276) as requiring
protection are located in the GSO at:
47° E, 59° E, 85° E, 90° E, 95° E, 113° E, 121° E, 160° E, 171.5° E,

174° W, 171° W, 170° W, 160° W, 139° W.
Separation angles between these specified GSO locations and terrestrial fixed services
may be calculated using the algorithm given in Annex 2 of ITU-R Recommendation
F.12493.
The limits shown in Table 1 for the bands 2025-2110 MHz and 2200-2290 MHz
apply to point-to-point systems. For point-to-multipoint systems or point-to-point
systems employing Automatic Transmit Power Control (ATPC) other limits may
apply (refer to Recommendation F.1247).
2
ITU-R Recommendation F.1247 “Technical and operational characteristics of systems in the Fixed
Service to facilitate sharing with the Space Research, Space Operation and Earth-Exploration Satellite
Services operating in the bands 2025-2110MHz and 2200-2290 MHz”.
3
ITU-R Recommendation F.1249 “Maximum Equivalent Isotropically Radiated Power of transmitting
stations in the Fixed Service operating in the frequency band 25.25-27.5 GHz shared with the
Inter-Satellite Service”.
FX 3 Appendix 5 - Geostationary Satellite Orbit Avoidance October 1999

3
2.2 Default Orbit Avoidance Criteria

For the cases not covered in Table 1 (see section 2.1), the default orbit avoidance
criteria specified in Table 2 shall apply.
Band EIRP limit Minimum Separation Angle (Note 2)

(GHz) (dBW) (degrees)
1-10 +35 2°
10-15 +45 1.5°
>15 +55 Not defined
Table 2. General (default) orbit avoidance criteria 4.
Note 2: Separation angles need to be calculated for all services whose EIRP exceeds
the relevant (Table 2) limits. Separation angles with the GSO may be calculated using
the algorithm provided in Annex 2 5 of ITU-R Recommendation SF.765 “Intersection
of Radio-Relay Antenna beams with orbits used by Space Stations in the Fixed-
Satellite Service”.
3. GSO avoidance necessary to protect the fixed service

Many fixed service band allocations are shared with GSO space radiocommunication
services operating in the space-to-Earth direction. Normally the relevant power flux
density limits (applicable to the space based service and specified at the surface of the
Earth) serve to fully protect the operation of fixed and other terrestrial services.
However, in situations where main beam or significant sidelobe coupling occurs
between a receiving station of the fixed service and a co-frequency transmitting
station within the GSO, severe long term interference may be experienced. The
severity of such interference is dependent upon the degree of antenna coupling, pfd
levels at the FS receiver location and FS receiver sensitivity.
In the absence of detailed orbit avoidance criteria for the protection of fixed service
receivers from the emissions of GSO based space-to-Earth emissions, the following
methodology may be used to evaluate potential interference levels on a case-by-case
basis:
1. Determine co-frequency pfd levels at the terrestrial fixed service location, as

typically provided in ITU-R satellite notices (pfd footprint) or use regulatory
limits;
2. Calculate interference noise power (Ir) at the FS receiver input:
 λ2 
Ir = pfd + G + 10 log   + 10 log B - Lr (dBW)
 4π 
where:
4
Based upon the requirements specified under Article S21 (WRC-95) of the ITU Radio Regulations.
5
Includes computer program source code facilitating the calculation of separation angles.

4
pfd - power flux density (dB(W/m2/MHz)) at the FS receiver location;

G - FS receiver antenna gain (dBi) in direction of GSO satellite (Note 2);
λ - wavelength at operating frequency (m);
B - FS receiver bandwidth (MHz); and
Lr - FS receive feeder loss (dB).
The above calculation is based on a 1 MHz reference bandwidth. Where a

different reference bandwidth is adopted an appropriate correction will need to be
incorporated in the calculation (eg. 4 kHz is traditionally specified for analogue
systems); and
3. Compare the calculated interference noise power against the FS system wanted
receive signal power and the relevant interference management criteria
(ie. ITU-R recommendations, in particular, F.758 and F.1094).
As a general comment, fixed service operators should seek to avoid main beam
coupling with the GSO for their own protection at the route/network planning stage.
Even where a band may not currently be co-allocated with space radiocommunication
services, the world-wide trend is for increased frequency sharing and avoidance of the
GSO (where possible) should be taken into account at the planning stage as part of
prudent risk management.

ANNEX A to APPENDIX 5 : Microwave Fixed Service Bands Sharing with
GSO Space Services
Table 1 provides a summary 1 (current at July 1998) of the microwave fixed service bands within
which space services operating in the Geostationary Orbit may need to be considered during fixed
service frequency coordination. Fixed service operators should note the trend for increased
sharing between fixed and GSO space services. Accordingly, fixed service bands not listed in
Table 1 may be the subject of such sharing in the future.
Microwave Fixed Service Band (GHz) GSO Space Service Allocation

1.5 Space operation, BSS, MSS
2.1 Space operation, MSS
3.8 FSS
6 FSS
6.7 FSS
7.5 FSS
8 FSS, MSS
11 FSS
13 FSS
15 FSS
18 FSS
22 BSS, ISS
38 FSS
49 FSS
50 FSS
Table 1. Microwave fixed service bands within which GSO space services are allocated on a
co-primary basis.
1
Derived from the “Australian Radiofrequency Spectrum Plan, January 1997” and the Report of the RCC Working
Group on “Spectrum Demand for New Telecommunications Services”, March 1998.
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 5 - Microwave Fixed Service Bands Sharing with GSO Space Services August 1998
APPENDIX 6: Application of Assignment Policy Rules
This appendix to RALI FX 3 provides guidance to frequency assigners regarding the

application of assignment instructions and planning rules specified in the RALI and
the case-by-case consideration of assignment applications seeking the relaxation of
specific assignment policy rules.
As discussed in the introduction to Part 3 of RALI FX 3, assignment instructions,

coordination and general system planning rules are necessary for the management of
interference and the optimisation of spectrum usage for microwave fixed services.
The policy objectives for these assignment and planning rules are to establish a
reasonable balance between unnecessary spectrum denial, the likelihood of
interference and the cost of implementing services.
Consistency
The consistent application of the rules is particularly important at locations of high
spectrum demand, including designated HSDA (see Part 3.3.2), regional centres,
radio-relay routes and shared radiocommunication sites.
Consistency is also important for equity reasons as well as from a technical spectrum
management perspective and:
• every microwave fixed service assignment application should be routinely checked

for compliance against all relevant RALI specified assignment criteria;
• where a proposal fails to meet the relevant assignment criteria, the applicant should
be advised of their options with respect to compliance with that criteria;
• if a formal relaxation from the application of an assignment instruction or planning
rule is being sought, each proposal must be considered on it's individual merits (ie.
case-by-case) in accordance with the principles established in the following section
“Case-by-case Consideration”;
• in cases where, after due consideration of relevant matters, an assignment is made
which does not accord with the relevant RALI specified assignment criteria, the
assignment record is to be annotated with an outline of the reason or a reference to
where such information may be found;
• should uncertainty remain regarding the policy objectives supported by, or the
intended scope of, a particular assignment instruction or planning rule, advice may
be sought from the Manager, Spectrum Engineering, Spectrum Planning Branch,
ACMA.
FX 3 Appendix 6 - Application of Assignment Policy Rules August 1998

2
Case-by-case Consideration
Annex A to this appendix outlines a number of (relatively straightforward) examples
of the case-by-case consideration of applications seeking the relaxation of particular
assignment or planning rules.
Clearly these simplistic examples represent only a sample of the potentially limitless
range of situations likely to be encountered in the process of assigning frequencies for
radiocommunication services. However, the common thread in all such cases is the
need to consider the circumstances of each situation individually in the light of all
relevant factors and with specific reference to the requirements of ACA Information
Paper “Principles for Decision Making” 1. Accordingly:
• prior to considering the application of an assignment instruction or planning rule,

frequency assigners need to ensure that it is intended to be applicable in the
particular case. Having decided that it is, a decision should be made about whether
the application of the policy rule is appropriate under the circumstances;
• such considerations must take account of the RALI policy objectives supported by
the specific assignment criteria under question and the consequences that an
anomalous assignment may have on these objectives, balanced against any specific
arguments as to why the policy rule should not be applied in the particular
circumstances presented by the application; and
• earlier cases where individual consideration may have resulted in an approval must
not be construed as automatic grounds for the routine approval of subsequent
cases, as each case must be considered on its own merits.
Typically, considerations will revolve around the need to maintain spectrum

productivity for the overall fixed service user community, balanced against the
legitimate needs of individual spectrum users. A number of questions naturally arise
in conjunction with the consideration of unorthodox assignment proposals and the
RALI specified assignment policy objectives including (but not limited to) the
following:
• is the proposed frequency assignment located within designated HSDA or other

relatively high spectrum demand area?
• is the proposed assignment likely to unreasonably impinge on the deployment of
radiocommunication services by other (future) users?
• if there is a potential impact on other users, how significant is that impact likely to
be, taking into account anticipated spectrum demand?
• does the proposal cover temporary or permanent operation?
1
With particular reference to section 7 “Consideration and Flexible Application of Government
Policy” in ACA Information Paper "Principles for Decision Making".
FX 3 Appendix 6 - Application of Assignment Policy Rules October 1999

3
• if the relaxation being sought is of a short term nature (eg. to support temporary
operation pending the cutover of another service), what is the proposed duration?
Account also needs to be taken of the relative weighting of individual assignment

instructions and planning rules in the context of maintaining spectrum productivity.
For example, the application of antenna requirements should be considered as having
a much greater weighting than that of say, assignment priority criteria. Naturally, the
relative weighting of each such criteria may be moderated by other relevant factors,
such as geographic location or that temporary operation is much less likely to
compromise the needs of other spectrum users.
In cases where the “temporary” relaxation of assignment policy is being considered,

the proposed period will usually need to be explicitly quantified and agreed with the
applicant. Where an application is approved under these circumstances, “temporary”
operation would normally be for a period of less than twelve months.
In summary, the relaxation of assignment policy requirements should be exceptional

rather than routine.
In cases where doubt remains regarding the intent of the policy outlined in this
section, advice should be sought from the Manager, Spectrum Engineering, Spectrum
Planning Branch, ACMA.
FX 3 Appendix 6 - Application of Assignment Policy Rules August 1998

ANNEX A to APPENDIX 6: Examples in support of Appendix 6
This annex provides background information only and is intended to be read in

conjunction with Appendix 6 "Application of Assignment Policy Rules". It outlines
several example cases of the assessment of applications seeking the relaxation of
particular RALI assignment or planning rules. The examples are provided in order to
demonstrate the application of the general approach outlined in Appendix 6 in
considering some of the more exceptional fixed link assignment applications.
Examples of applications seeking the relaxation of individual Assignment

Instructions or Planning Rules
CASE I: A licensee cancels an existing fixed link licence and seeks to re-use the
recovered link equipment at another location. However, the operating frequencies of
the recovered equipment do not accord with the channels designated by the
assignment priority criteria as applicable at the proposed new link location.
Although the recovered (older) equipment is in sound working order, it is not readily
retuneable and would need to be sent back to the manufacturer for re-alignment.
As with most of the other RALI coordination and planning rules, assignment priority
criteria is intended to facilitate efficient spectrum re-use through the optimisation of
overall link densities within a given spectrum space. Accordingly, assigners are
expected to practice and encourage the principle of "vertical loading" of
radiofrequency channels as a matter of good routine engineering practice. However,
it is recognised that some situations (such as outlined above) do arise where a
reasonable case can be presented to relax the application of the RALI specified
assignment priority. Overall, it can be demonstrated that the relaxation of assignment
priority criteria in isolated cases (as outlined above) will not significantly affect
spectrum productivity.
CASE II: An applicant proposes a fixed point-to-point link in the 7.5 GHz band
with a necessary channel bandwidth of 14 MHz. However, the proposed path length
of 6 km does not meet the minimum path length criteria of 20 km for the band. The
proposed link will be located in a high rainfall area close to a designated HSDA.
The minimum path length requirement is intended to encourage fixed link operators to
preserve the lower frequency bands for long link paths. In considering this particular
case, it is noted that there are a number of alternative RALI FX 3 arrangements,
ie. 10/15/18/22/38 GHz, which provide a 14 MHz channel raster. It is recognised,
however, that the higher of these alternative bands may not be suitable for the
proposed link, given the location in a high rainfall area. Overall, although the
proposed link is not strictly within a designated HSDA, it is considered that the
relatively short proposed path length is achievable in other (higher) bands and
accordingly, the proposal is not supportable.
Note: The above examples, although based upon (simplified) actual cases, are
provided as background information (for Appendix 6) only and must not be
interpreted as explicit policy rulings or instant recipes for different fixed link
assignment situations.
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 6 - Examples in support of Appendix 6 April 2004

APPENDIX 7: Coordination of Apparatus Licences with Spectrum Licences:
1.8, 2.1 and 2.2 GHz Band Fixed Services
Table of Contents
1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................................ 2
2 BASIC COORDINATION PRINCIPLES .................................................................................................................. 3

2.1 COORDINATION ACROSS THE GEOGRAPHIC BOUNDARY ................................................................................................ 3
2.1.1 Co-channel - Apparatus licence transmitter ............................................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Co-channel - Apparatus licence receiver .................................................................................................... 4
2.2 COORDINATION ACROSS THE FREQUENCY BOUNDARY .......................................................................................... 4
2.2.1 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence transmitter .......................................................................................... 4
2.2.2 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence receiver ............................................................................................... 4
3 COORDINATION THRESHOLD DISTANCE ................................................................................................... 4
4 COORDINATION SCENARIOS - 1.8 GHZ BAND ................................................................................................. 5

4.1 COORDINATION ACROSS THE GEOGRAPHIC BOUNDARY - 1.8 GHZ BAND ...................................................................... 5
4.1.1 Co-channel - Apparatus licence transmitter located in the remote area and within 200 km of the regional
spectrum licence boundary ............................................................................................................................................ 5
4.1.2 Co-channel - Apparatus licence receiver located in the remote area and within 200 km of the regional
4.1.3 Co-channel - Apparatus licence transmitter located in the regional area and within 200 km of the major city
4.1.4 Co-channel - Apparatus licence receiver located in the regional area and within 200 km of the major city
4.2 COORDINATION ACROSS THE FREQUENCY BOUNDARY - 1.8 GHZ BAND ....................................................................... 9
4.2.1 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence transmitter located in the regional area ...................................................... 9
4.2.2 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence receiver located in the regional area ........................................................... 9
4.2.3 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence transmitter located in a major city area ...................................................... 9
4.2.4 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence receiver located in a major city area ........................................................... 9
5 COORDINATION SCENARIOS - 2.1 AND 2.2 GHZ BANDS ................................................................................ 9
5.1 COORDINATION ACROSS THE GEOGRAPHIC BOUNDARY - 2.1 GHZ BAND ...................................................................... 9
5.1.1 Co-channel - Apparatus licence transmitter within 200 km of the spectrum licence boundary ......................... 10
5.1.2 Co-channel - Apparatus licence receiver within 200 km of the spectrum licence boundary ............................. 10
5.2 COORDINATION ACROSS THE FREQUENCY BOUNDARY - 2.1 AND 2.2 GHZ BANDS ...................................................... 12
5.2.1 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence transmitter located in a spectrum licensed area ........................................ 12
5.2.2 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence receiver located in a spectrum licensed area ............................................. 12
6 ADDITIONAL DEVICE BOUNDARY REQUIREMENT - 2.1 GHZ BAND TRANSMITTERS ..................... 12
FX 3 Appendix 7 - Coordination of Apparatus Licences

with Spectrum Licences : 1.8, 2.1 and 2.2 GHz Band Fixed Services
September 2001
2
1 Introduction
This document provides guidance on the approach to be taken in coordinating proposed 1.8, 2.1 and
2.2 GHz apparatus licensed (AL) fixed service links with spectrum licences (SL), across both the
geographic and the frequency boundaries of SL’s. The spectrum arrangements for AL and SL
radiocommunication services are outlined in the 1.8, 2.1 and 2.2 GHz RF Channel Arrangements
and Assignment Instructions in Appendix 1 of the RALI FX 3. The following sections set out the
principles for such coordination and point to the relevant coordination requirements and criteria
contained in other documents for anticipated AL/SL coordination scenarios.
Users of this appendix should familiarise themselves with the relevant spectrum licensing
framework (either the 1.8 or 2 GHz band arrangements).
Documents required to undertake the coordination described in this appendix are,

for 1.8 GHz Band coordination:
• Radiocommunications (Unacceptable Levels of Interference-1800 MHz Band) Determination
1999 (referred to as “s145 determination-1800”);
• Radiocommunications Advisory Guidelines (Protection of Apparatus-licensed and Class-
licensed Receivers - 1800 MHz Band) 1999 (referred to as “RAG-ALRX-1800”);
• Radiocommunications Advisory Guidelines (Managing Interference from Apparatus-licensed
and Class-licensed Transmitters - 1800 MHz Band) 1999 (referred to as “RAG-ALTX-1800”);
and
• Radiocommunications Advisory Guidelines (Protection of Mobile Base Receivers -
1800 MHz Lower Band) 1999 (referred to as “RAG-BaseRxLower-1800”);
and for 2.1 and 2.2 GHz Band 1 coordination:
• Radiocommunications (Unacceptable Levels of Interference-2 GHz Band) Determination
2000 (referred to as “s145 determination-2GHz”);
• Radiocommunications Advisory Guidelines (Protection of Apparatus-licensed and Class-
licensed Receivers - 2 GHz Band) 2000 (referred to as “RAG-ALRX-2GHz”); and
• Radiocommunications Advisory Guidelines (Managing Interference from Apparatus-licensed
and Class-licensed Transmitters - 2 GHz Band) 2000 (referred to as “RAG-ALTX-2GHz”).
The above determinations and guidelines form part of the interference management framework for
spectrum licences in each of the 1.8 and 2 GHz bands. Spectrum licensees will have acquired their
spectrum licences on the basis of that framework. Accordingly, it may be expected that spectrum
licensees will anticipate that those determinations and guidelines will normally be followed, and
that they (the licensees) will be able to establish services within their spectrum space in accordance
with that framework. Nevertheless, in some circumstances it may be possible to depart from the
framework, for example with the agreement of relevant spectrum licensees. It should be noted,
however, that the position is likely to change when licences are traded. In such an event, either
such agreements would need to be re-negotiated, or the operating characteristics of devices would
have to be modified, to ensure that the framework is again followed.
1
Note that the spectrum licensed band overlapping the '2.1 GHz Band' for fixed services, is known as the '2 GHz Band'
in context of spectrum licensing arrangements.
September 2001
3
2 Basic coordination principles

For every proposed 1.8, 2.1 or 2.2 GHz fixed service AL receiver or transmitter, consideration
should be given to whether coordination is required across the geographic boundary and also the
frequency boundary of all relevant SL’s.
In the context of 1.8 GHz spectrum licensing, the terms “remote”, “regional” and “major city” are
used in the following text to describe areas. Areas defined in the Spectrum Re-allocation
Declarations No. 3 of 1997 for Adelaide, Brisbane, Melbourne, Perth and Sydney constitute “major
city” areas. The areas defined in Spectrum Re-allocation Declarations No. 4 of 1997 are referred to
as “regional” areas, and the remainder of Australia is referred to as “remote”. See also the
coordination threshold contours map of the 1.8 GHz band Channel Arrangements and Assignment
Instructions in Appendix 1 of RALI FX-3.
In the context of 2 GHz spectrum licensing, terms to group areas are not so relevant to interference
management. The term "capital city areas" is used, and all other spectrum licence areas are
considered to be "regional". No "remote" areas have been allocated at 2 GHz. Areas are defined in
the Spectrum Re-allocation Declaration No. 2 of 2000. See also the coordination threshold contours
map of the 2.1 GHz band Channel Arrangements and Assignment Instructions in Appendix 1 of
RALI FX-3.
2.1 Coordination across the geographic boundary

AL fixed stations requiring coordination with a SL need to coordinate with a “spectrum space” as
opposed to traditional coordination which is undertaken with respect to other radiocommunications
devices. Therefore, SL coordination principles need to be utilised for coordination of AL fixed
stations with SL’s.
To determine whether coordination is required across the geographic boundary, a coordination

threshold distance is used. The coordination threshold distances for AL fixed stations are specified
in section 3 of this appendix and illustrated in the 1.8 and 2.1 GHz Band Channel Arrangements in
Appendix 1 of RALI FX-3. Proposed fixed stations (transmitters or receivers) outside this distance
should not require coordination with SL’s.
2.1.1 Co-channel - Apparatus licence transmitter

To protect a SL from a proposed (ie new or re-tuned) co-channel 2 AL transmitter, the AL
transmitter should be treated as though it were spectrum licensed. That is, the proposed AL
transmitter will be considered to not interfere with the SL if the device boundary (a polygon) of the
AL transmitter does not intrude into the co-channel SL area. The device boundary criterion and the
method to determine the device boundary polygon are specified in a determination made under
Section 145 of the Radiocommunications Act 1992 (referred to as either s145 determination-1800
or s145 determination-2GHz).
Proposed AL (and SL) transmitters in the 1.8 GHz lower band near "areas of high mobile use", in
addition to meeting the device boundary criterion specified in the s145 determination-1800, must
meet a second device boundary requirement. (Areas of high mobile use are defined in
s145 determination-1800 and include all major city areas plus Canberra.) This additional device
boundary requirement is set out in RAG-BaseRxLower-1800.
2
As SL’s are not channelised the term “in-band” is used in spectrum licensing documentation instead of “co-channel”.
The terms "in-band" or "co-channel" include any AL service with an occupied bandwidth that overlaps the frequency
band of the SL considered.
September 2001
4
Proposed AL transmitters in the 2 GHz lower band must all meet a second device boundary
requirement. This additional device boundary requirement is set out in section 6 of this appendix.
2.1.2 Co-channel - Apparatus licence receiver

As detailed in the relevant RAG-ALRX, proposed (ie. new or re-tuned) AL receivers must accept
emissions from devices operated within the SL space up to the maximum levels permitted by the
s145 determination and core conditions of the SL. Existing AL receivers are provided with
protection as per the RAG-ALRX which points to the protection requirements specified in
Appendix 1 to RALI FX 3.
Should a proposed AL receiver fail the standard coordination procedure described in this appendix,
the licence applicant may wish to make their own assessment of the risk involved in operating the
receiver close to the SL boundary. In doing so they might consider possible locations for SL
transmitters such as existing radiocommunications sites or other locations suitable for
radiocommunications transmission sites (for example hill or mountain tops) and the probability that
a spectrum licensee would deploy systems in the area. If the applicant wishes to proceed with the
assignment, such receivers may be proposed for licensing on a “no protection” basis.
2.2 Coordination across the frequency boundary

Coordination across the AL/SL frequency boundary is performed on the basis of potential
interference between the proposed device and existing SL devices.
2.2.1 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence transmitter

In coordinating proposed AL transmitters, protection is to be provided to registered SL receivers as
per the notional receiver specified in the relevant RAG-ALTX.
2.2.2 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence receiver

AL receivers can expect protection from new SL transmitters to the levels specified in RAG-ALRX
which points to the protection requirements specified in Appendix 1 to RALI FX 3. When
assigning a new fixed receiver, an assessment of the interference potential of registered SL
transmitters should be made.
3 Coordination threshold distance

For fixed service assignments in areas adjacent to SL areas, the coordination threshold distance is
specified in Table 3.1.
AL fixed service band Coordination threshold distance

1.8 GHz Band 200 km
2.1 GHz Band 200 km
2.2 GHz Band None
Table 3.1
Any proposed fixed station within this distance of a co-channel SL boundary will need to be
coordinated with the SL area as described in this appendix. Outside this distance normal
microwave fixed services coordination criteria and procedures apply.
In certain scenarios, the coordination threshold distance for transmitters (only) can be reduced. The
coordination threshold distance was determined on the basis of protecting an AL fixed service

September 2001
5
receiver from SL devices within the spectrum space. As a different interference framework applies
to SL receivers compared with AL fixed service receivers, lower power AL fixed service
transmitters may use a reduced coordination threshold distance if certain criteria are met. These
criteria are shown in Table 3.2.
AL fixed service band AL fixed transmitter criteria Reduced Tx

coordination threshold
distance
1.8 GHz Band AL transmitter EIRP < 54.5 dBm/30 kHz, AND 50 km
effective antenna height 3 < 400 m.
2.1 GHz Band Any AL transmitter in 2.1 GHz Upper Band: 50 km
2100 – 2294.5 MHz
2.2 GHz Band All cases None
Table 3.2
4 Coordination scenarios - 1.8 GHz Band

This section addresses each coordination case possible in the 1.8 GHz fixed services band.
4.1 Coordination across the geographic boundary - 1.8 GHz Band

This section addresses each coordination case for 1.8 GHz AL fixed stations that are co-channel
with a SL and are outside the SL area.
4.1.1 Co-channel - Apparatus licence transmitter located in the remote area and within 200 km
of the regional spectrum licence boundary
The frequency ranges available for this transmitter are:
Lower Band: 1706 - 1805 MHz

Upper Band: 1805 - 1880 MHz and 1900 - 1917 MHz
If the effective occupied bandwidth of the proposed AL transmitter overlaps the frequency ranges
1710 - 1725 MHz or 1805 - 1820 MHz 4 then coordination with the regional SL is necessary if the
proposed transmitter is within 50 km of the regional SL boundary. Coordination should also be
undertaken for transmitters more than 50 km from the SL boundary if the EIRP and effective
antenna height of the AL transmitter exceed those specified in section 3 of this appendix.
Note: In some areas, particularly Western Australia, an AL transmitter in the remote area may also
be within 200 km of a major city area and must coordinate as per section 4.1.3 of this appendix.
To coordinate: A device boundary polygon should be determined in accordance with

s145 determination. If the device boundary polygon intrudes into the regional SL area then the
assignment is NOT permitted. (If the applicant wishes to pursue the assignment further they could
consider ways of reducing the device boundary polygon such as a reduction in power, reducing the
effective antenna height, or improved antenna discrimination.)
3
Effective antenna height is defined in Schedule 3 of s145 determination.
4
1710 - 1725 MHz and 1805 - 1820 MHz are the frequency ranges of the regional SL’s.
September 2001
6
4.1.2 Co-channel - Apparatus licence receiver located in the remote area and within 200 km of
the regional spectrum licence boundary
Proposed AL receivers located in the remote area must be coordinated with the regional SL if their
related transmitter’s effective occupied bandwidth overlaps the frequency ranges 1710 - 1725 MHz
or 1805 - 1820 MHz, and the proposed AL receiver is within 200 km of the SL boundary.
Note: In some areas, particularly Western Australia, an AL receiver in the remote area may also be
within 200 km of a major city area and must coordinate with the major city area as per section 4.1.4
of this appendix.
To coordinate: A number of methodologies are possible for coordination of an AL receiver with an

SL as follows:
(a) A device boundary polygon may be calculated for the receiver using a device boundary
criterion. The device boundary is calculated in a manner similar to that for a transmitter as
described in s145 determination except that the device boundary criterion is replaced by:
RLOP - LOP
where:
RLOP is the level of protection required by the AL fixed service receiver for normal
operation; and
LOP is the level of protection that would be achieved at a particular distance from the
SL boundary.
RLOP = WL - PR - AD
where:
WL = Wanted receive input Level (dBm) of the fixed service receiver;
PR = Protection Ratio as specified in the 1.8 GHz Assignment Instructions in
Appendix 1); and
AD = Antenna Discrimination for the particular radial.
LOP = 63 - L - LL + 10∗Log10(N)
where:
L= The greater of either FSL or OHL;
LL = Transmission line losses including feeder and combiner losses; and
N = The likely number of 200 kHz bandwidth spectrum licensed transmitters
within the receiver bandwidth (suggest N = 4 for coordination with
regional boundaries and N= 10 for major city boundaries);
and where:
FSL = free space loss
FSL = 32.45 + 20∗Log10(Freq) + 20∗Log10(Dist)
OHL = over the horizon loss 5
OHL = 29.73 + 30∗Log10(Freq) + 10∗Log10(Dist) + 30∗Log10(Theta) +
20∗Log10(5 + (0.27∗Theta∗Dist)/4000) + 0.00125∗Theta2
and where:
Theta = (Dist - dh)/8.5 (OHL not valid for Theta < 0);
5
OHL is based on median troposcatter loss for a continental temperate climate (refer to Recommendation P.617-1).
September 2001
7
Dist = Distance along each radial to the boundary (in km) plus 48 km;
Freq = Frequency (in MHz);
dh = 4.123∗(he1(φn)0.5 + 19.5) (OHL not valid for dh > Dist); and
he1(φn) = the effective antenna height above average terrain for segment 1 for
each bearing φn (in metres) as defined in s145 determination;
OR
(b) A device boundary polygon may be calculated for the receiver using a device boundary
criterion as in (a) except that L is the propagation loss determined in accordance with the general
method for estimating diffraction loss described in ITU Recommendation P.526, using a path
profile derived from the ACA’s digital elevation model RadDEM and an effective earth radius
factor of k=3, or some other appropriate method.
To calculate L, a notional transmitter is assumed to be located in the geographic area of the SL at a

point on each radial 48 km inside the boundary. The notional site height for these transmitters is
350 metres and the notional antenna height above ground is 30 metres.
If coordination fails: If the receiver fails coordination under methods (a) or (b) above, the licence
applicant may wish to make their own assessment of the risk involved in operating the receiver
close to the SL boundary (refer section 2.1.2 of this appendix). Should the applicant wish to
proceed with the assignment advisory note FA must be applied to the spectrum access record.
Advisory note FA reads:

“If interference to a station operated under this licence is caused by a radiocommunications
device that is authorised to operate under a spectrum licence, the ACA will consider any
dispute from the starting point that the spectrum licence has priority over this licence,
irrespective of the date that the spectrum licensed device was first operated.”
4.1.3 Co-channel - Apparatus licence transmitter located in the regional area and within 200 km
of the major city spectrum licence boundary

Upper Band: 1820 - 1880 MHz and 1900 - 1917 MHz
1725 - 1785 MHz or 1820 - 1880 MHz 6 then coordination with the major city SL is necessary if the
proposed transmitter is within 200 km of the regional SL boundary.
To coordinate: In this case the coordination process differs depending upon whether the proposed
transmitter is within the lower or upper bands as additional requirements are placed on transmitters
in the lower band. Step 1 must be satisfied for transmitters in both bands within 50 km 7 of the SL
6
1710 - 1785 MHz and 1805 - 1880 MHz are the frequency ranges of the major city SL’s. The lower
15 MHz of each of these blocks is common to the regional SL licences and cannot be used by AL
fixed services in regional areas.
7
A coordination threshold distance of 50 km is appropriate only if the EIRP and effective antenna
height of the proposed AL transmitter are consistent with that specified in section 3 of this appendix. Transmitters
not meeting these requirements must be coordinated when within 200 km of the SL boundary.
September 2001
8
boundary. However, Step 2 must also be satisfied for transmitters in the lower band below 1785
MHz that are within 200 km of the major city SL boundary.
Step 1: A device boundary polygon should be determined in accordance with

s145 determination. If the device boundary polygon intrudes into the major city SL area then the
assignment is NOT permitted. (If the applicant wishes to pursue the assignment further they could
consider ways of reducing the device boundary polygon such as a reduction in power, reducing the
effective antenna height, or improved antenna discrimination.)
Step 2: If the proposed AL transmitter is in the lower band, below 1785 MHz, then an additional
device boundary requirement must also be met as described in clauses 4.2 and 4.3 of
RAG-BaseRxLower-1800. An additional device boundary polygon should be calculated in
accordance with the additional device boundary criterion set out in schedule 1 of RAG-
BaseRxLower-1800 and using the basic methodology set out in s145 determination.
4.1.4 Co-channel - Apparatus licence receiver located in the regional area and within
200 km of the major city spectrum licence boundary
Proposed AL receivers located in the regional area must be coordinated with the major city SL if
their related transmitter’s effective occupied bandwidth overlaps the frequency ranges 1725 - 1785
MHz or 1820 - 1880 MHz, and the proposed AL receiver is within 200 km of the SL boundary. As
SL transmitters in the lower of these bands are restricted to low effective antenna heights (10 m or
less), AL receivers in the lower band will be able to be sited closer to the SL boundary than in the
upper band.
To coordinate: A number of methodologies to coordinate an AL receiver with an SL are possible:
(a) For receivers operating in either of the above mentioned bands, a device boundary polygon
could be calculated using the device boundary criterion set out in section 4.1.2 of this appendix
except that for frequency range 1725 - 1785 MHz:
Dist = Distance along the radial in km to the point where the radial crosses
the 48 metre elevation contour of RadDEM after entering a (major city) area
of high mobile use; and
dh = 4.123∗(he1(φn)0.5 + 7.6) - for (major city) areas of high mobile use.
OR
(b) A device boundary polygon may be calculated for the receiver using a device boundary
criterion as in (a) except that L is the propagation loss determined in accordance with the general
method for estimating diffraction loss described in ITU Recommendation P.526, using a path
profile derived from the ACA’s digital elevation model RadDEM and an effective earth radius
factor of k=3, or some other appropriate method.
To calculate L, a notional transmitter is assumed to be located inside the geographic area of the SL
on each radial at the point where the radial crosses the 48 metre elevation contour of RadDEM after
entering a (major city) area of high mobile use. The notional antenna height above ground for the
transmitter is 10 metres.
If coordination fails: If the receiver fails coordination under methods (a) or (b) above, the licence
September 2001
9
proceed with the assignment advisory note FA must be applied to the spectrum access record.

“If interference to a station operated under this licence is caused by a radiocommunications
device that is authorised to operate under a spectrum licence, the ACA will consider any
dispute from the starting point that the spectrum licence has priority over this licence,
irrespective of the date that the spectrum licensed device was first operated.”
4.2 Coordination across the frequency boundary - 1.8 GHz Band

1.8 GHz AL fixed stations sited within SL areas but outside the SL frequency bands must be
coordinated as described in this section. AL fixed stations in close proximity to SL boundaries
should also pay regard to protection of and interference from SL devices.
4.2.1 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence transmitter located in the regional area
If an AL transmitter is proposed for operation in a regional area it must be coordinated with all
registered SL receivers in the frequency ranges 1710 - 1725 MHz and 1805 - 1820 MHz in
accordance with RAG-ALTX. Protection for SL receivers is provided to the levels required by the
notional SL receiver specified in schedule 1 of RAG-ALTX. (Refer also to clause 2.5; to part 4; and
to schedule 2; of RAG-ALTX). AL transmitters must comply with the emission criteria
requirements specified in Part 3.2.3 of RALI FX 3.
4.2.2 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence receiver located in the regional area
If an AL receiver is proposed for operation in a regional area it must be coordinated with registered
SL transmitters in the frequency ranges 1710 - 1725 MHz and 1805 - 1820 MHz in accordance with
clause 2.5 of RAG-ALRX.
4.2.3 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence transmitter located in a major city area
If an AL transmitter is proposed for operation in a major city area it must be coordinated with all
registered SL receivers in the frequency ranges 1710 - 1785 MHz and 1805 - 1880 MHz in
accordance with RAG-ALTX. Protection for SL receivers is provided to the levels required by the
notional SL receiver specified in schedule 1 of RAG-ALTX. (Refer also to clause 2.5; to part 4; and
to schedule 2; of RAG-ALTX). AL transmitters must comply with the emission criteria
requirements specified in Part 3.2.3 of RALI FX 3.
4.2.4 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence receiver located in a major city area
If an AL receiver is proposed for operation in a major city area it must be coordinated with all
registered SL transmitter in the frequency ranges 1710 - 1785 MHz and 1805 - 1880 MHz in
accordance with clause 2.5 of RAG-ALRX.
5 Coordination scenarios - 2.1 and 2.2 GHz Bands

This section addresses each coordination case possible in the 2.1 and 2.2 GHz fixed services bands.
5.1 Coordination across the geographic boundary - 2.1 GHz Band

This section addresses each coordination case for 2.1 GHz AL fixed stations that are co-channel
with a SL and are outside the SL area. 2.2 GHz AL fixed stations do not operate co-channel and are
therefore not addressed in the following sections.

September 2001
10
5.1.1 Co-channel - Apparatus licence transmitter within 200 km of the spectrum licence
boundary

Upper Band: 2100 – 2294.5 MHz
1900 - 1980 MHz or 2110 - 2170 MHz 8 then coordination with the major city SL is necessary if the
proposed transmitter is within 200 km of the major city SL boundary. If the effective occupied
bandwidth of the proposed AL transmitter overlaps the frequency ranges 1960 - 1980 MHz or 2150
- 2170 MHz then coordination with the regional SL is necessary if the proposed transmitter is
within 200 km of the regional SL boundary.
To coordinate: In this case the coordination process differs depending upon whether the proposed
transmitter is within the lower or upper bands as additional requirements are placed on transmitters
in the lower band. Case 1 must be satisfied for transmitters in the Upper Band within 50 km 9 of the
SL boundary. Case 2 must be satisfied for transmitters in the Lower Band below
1980 MHz that are within 200 km of the SL boundary.
Case 1: A device boundary polygon should be determined in accordance with

s145 determination. If the device boundary polygon intrudes into the SL area then the assignment
is NOT permitted. (If the applicant wishes to pursue the assignment further they could consider
ways of reducing the device boundary polygon such as a reduction in power, reducing the effective
antenna height, or improved antenna discrimination.)
Case 2: If the proposed AL transmitter is in the Lower Band, below 1980 MHz, then the additional
device boundary requirement must be met. The additional device boundary polygon should be
calculated in accordance with the additional device boundary criterion set out in section 6
"Additional Device Boundary Requirement -- 2.1 GHz Band transmitters", which follows the basic
methodology set out in s145 determination.
5.1.2 Co-channel - Apparatus licence receiver within 200 km of the spectrum licence boundary
If the effective occupied bandwidth of the proposed AL receiver's related transmitter overlaps the
frequency ranges 1900 - 1980 MHz or 2110 - 2170 MHz then coordination with the major city SL is
necessary if the proposed receiver is within 200 km of the major city SL boundary. If the effective
occupied bandwidth of the proposed AL receiver's related transmitter overlaps the frequency ranges
1960 - 1980 MHz or 2150 - 2170 MHz then coordination with the regional SL is necessary if the
proposed receiver is within 200 km of the regional SL boundary.
To skip receiver coordination: Instead of following the receiver coordination method below, the
licence applicant may wish to make their own assessment of the risk involved in operating the
receiver close to the SL boundary (refer section 2.1.2 of this appendix). In this case, advisory
note FA must be applied to the spectrum access record.
8
1900 - 1980 MHz and 2110 - 2170 MHz are the frequency ranges of the major city SL’s. The upper
20 MHz of each of these blocks is common to the regional SL licences and cannot be used by AL
fixed services in regional areas.
9
This reduction is because coordination is in the 2 GHz SL band typically used for 'mobile Rx' (high site-to-low site).
September 2001
11

“If interference to a station operated under this licence is caused by a radiocommunications device
that is authorised to operate under a spectrum licence, the ACA will consider any dispute from the
starting point that the spectrum licence has priority over this licence, irrespective of the date that
the spectrum licensed device was first operated.”
To coordinate: The method for coordination of an AL receiver with a SL is:
A device boundary polygon may be calculated for the receiver using a device boundary criterion.
The device boundary is calculated in a manner similar to that for a transmitter as described in
s145 determination except that the device boundary criterion is replaced by:
RLOP - LOP
where:
RLOP is the level of protection required by the AL fixed service receiver for normal
operation; and
LOP is the level of protection that would be achieved at a particular distance from the
SL boundary.
RLOP = WL - PR - AD
where:
WL = Wanted receive input Level (dBm per 30 kHz 10) of the fixed service receiver;
PR = Protection Ratio as specified in the 2 GHz Assignment Instructions in
Appendix 1); and
AD = Antenna Discrimination for the particular radial.
LOP = 55 - L
where:
L= The greater of either FSL or OHL;
and where:
FSL = free space loss
FSL = 32.45 + 20∗Log10(Freq) + 20∗Log10(Dist+48)
OHL = over the horizon loss 11
OHL = 29.73 + 30∗Log10(Freq) + 10∗Log10(Dist+48) + 30∗Log10(Theta) +
20∗Log10(5 + (0.27∗Theta∗(Dist+48))/4000) + 0.00125∗Theta2
and where:
Theta = (Dist + 48 - dh)/8.5 (OHL not valid for Theta < 0);
Dist = Distance along each radial to the boundary (in km);
Freq = Frequency (in MHz);
dh = 4.123∗(he1(φn)0.5 + 7.6) (OHL not valid for dh > Dist+48); and
he1(φn) = the effective antenna height above average terrain for segment 1 for
each bearing φn (in metres) as defined in s145 determination;
10
Note bandwidth conversion required here.
11
OHL is based on median troposcatter loss for a continental temperate climate (refer to Recommendation P.617-1).
September 2001
12
In this above calculation of L, a notional transmitter is assumed to be located in the geographic area
of the SL at a point on each radial 48 km inside the boundary. The notional site height for these
transmitters is 350 metres and the notional antenna height above ground is 30 metres.
If coordination fails: If the receiver fails coordination under the method above, the licence
proceed with the assignment advisory note FA must be applied to the spectrum access record. The
text for Advisory Note FA can be found on the previous page of this appendix.
5.2 Coordination across the frequency boundary - 2.1 and 2.2 GHz Bands
2.1 and 2.2 GHz AL fixed stations sited within SL areas but outside the SL frequency bands must
be coordinated as described in this section. AL fixed stations in close proximity to SL boundaries
should also pay regard to protection of and interference from SL devices.
5.2.1 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence transmitter located in a spectrum licensed area
If an AL transmitter is proposed for operation in a spectrum licensed area it must be coordinated
with all registered SL receivers in the frequency ranges shown in Table 5.2, in accordance with
RAG-ALTX-2GHz.
Spectrum Licence Area Frequency range

Adelaide, Brisbane, Darwin, 1900-1980 and 2110-2170 MHz
Hobart, Melbourne, Perth
and Sydney
Canberra 1900-1920, 1935-1980 and 2125-2170 MHz
Regional areas 1960-1980 and 2150-2170 MHz
Table 5.2: 2 GHz Spectrum Licence frequency ranges
Protection for SL receivers is provided to the levels required by the notional SL receiver specified
in schedule 1 of RAG-ALTX-2GHz. (Refer also to clause 2.2; to part 4; and to schedule 2; of RAG-
ALTX-2GHz). AL transmitters must comply with the emission criteria requirements specified in
Part 3.2.3 and Appendix 3 of RALI FX 3.
5.2.2 Adjacent band - Apparatus licence receiver located in a spectrum licensed area
If an AL receiver is proposed for operation in a spectrum licensed area it must be coordinated with
all registered SL transmitters in the frequency ranges shown in Table 5.2, in accordance with clause
2.6 of RAG-ALRX-2GHz.
6 Additional Device Boundary Requirement - 2.1 GHz Band transmitters
The additional device boundary requirement follows a method very similar to that detailed in s145
determination-2GHz, with a replaced device boundary criteria and propagation model. The new
propagation model accounts for diffraction and terrain profiles.
The additional device boundary is calculated according to the distance that is necessary to satisfy
the following device boundary criterion. This distance is measured along radials of a maximum
length of 150 minutes (measured by reference to the Australian National Spheroid) at every 2.5
degrees of arc (beginning at 1.25 degrees from True North) and centred on the transmitter location.
However, this additional criterion does not have to be satisfied if:
September 2001
13
(a) the licensee has an agreement with the licensee(s) of a spectrum licence whose geographic area
is intersected by the radials and whose frequency band contains the effective occupied
bandwidth of the transmitter, to operate transmitters that do not comply with the additional
device boundary criterion; or
(b) in the case of a transmitter operating under an apparatus licence, the licence was issued before
the date of issue of the Radiocommunications Spectrum Marketing Plan (2 GHz Bands) 2000.
The device boundary criterion is:
(HRP - Lb - CR) ≤ 0;
where HRP = Horizontally Radiated Power; and

Lb = Propagation Loss; and
CR = Compatibility Requirement for a notional receiver.
Calculation of Horizontally Radiated Power (HRP)

HRP (dBm EIRP per 30 kHz) is the horizontally radiated power for each radial. Note that there is a
cap on HRP of 55 dBm EIRP per 30 kHz for transmitters operating under spectrum licences.
High Site-High Site Propagation Model (Lb)

The propagation loss for a high site-high site transmit-receive path (Lb) may be worked out in
accordance with the general method for estimating diffraction loss described in ITU-R
Recommendation P.526 using a path profile derived from the ACA’s digital elevation model
(RadDEM terrain data) and an effective earth radius factor of 4/3, or some other appropriate method.
The path profile may be obtained by calculating equi-spaced (in degrees) locations every 9 seconds
along the radial from the transmitter site, reading the elevation of the RadDEM cell in which each
calculated location occurs.
[Note: Path profiles may also be obtained by bi-linear interpolation]
The notional receiver antenna height above ground is 30 metres.
The procedure of ITU-R Recommendation P.526 for calculating propagation loss is unusually
complex and licensees should exercise particular care when establishing whether a particular
service might meet the compatibility requirements under these guidelines. Licensees would be well
advised to confirm results calculated under the guidelines before taking any decisions in relation to
proposed services.
Compatibility Requirement
The level of protection for notional receivers (typically a base station) is -126 dBm/30 kHz. The
Notional antenna for a fixed receiver has a total gain of 19 dBi in all directions, including feeder
losses.

September 2001
APPENDIX 8 : Coordination of DRCS Outstations with Point-to-Point Links
1.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 2

1.2 DRCS NETWORK TOPOLOGY .......................................................................................................... 2
1.3 DRCS CELL PLAN AND INTRA-SYSTEM COORDINATION ................................................................. 3
1.4 INTERFERENCE POTENTIAL TO/FROM POINT-TO-POINT LINKS ......................................................... 3
1.5 METHODOLOGY .............................................................................................................................. 3
1.5.1 Interference from a point-to-point link transmitter to a DRCS outstation receiver ............... 4
1.5.2 Interference from a DRCS outstation transmitter to a point-to-point link receiver ............... 4
1.6 DETAILED COORDINATION .............................................................................................................. 4
Annex A 1.5 GHZ DRCS OUTSTATION CHARACTERISTICS

2
1.1 Introduction
This document provides information and guidance for the coordination between 1.5 GHz Digital
Radio Concentrator System (DRCS) point-to-multipoint services and point-to-point systems. As
outlined in Part 3 of RALI FX-3, DRCS systems provide public telecommunication services in rural
and remote areas. The majority of Australian DRCS rural telephony networks utilise the 1.5 GHz
(1427-1535 MHz) DRCS band, although in some areas 500 MHz 1 and “hybrid” 500/1500 MHz
systems may also operate. Spectrum within the band 1427-1535 MHz 2 is shared between DRCS
and regular point-to-point fixed services and, in accordance with the (Appendix 1) RF Channel
Arrangements, separate but overlaid arrangements are specified for point-to-point and DRCS
multipoint systems.
Given the inherent spectrum denial of DRCS hub stations (due to omnidirectional antennas) and the
unpredictable nature of potential interference between point-to-point links and uncoordinated DRCS
outstations, the deployment of 1.5 GHz point-to-multipoint systems is not normally permitted
within designated HSDA. Operation in other areas with high point-to-point link densities should
also be avoided. All applications seeking point-to-multipoint operation within the band 1427-1535
MHz and which encroach upon designated HSDA must be referred to the Manager, Spectrum
Planning Team, Spectrum Planning and Standards Group for policy advice.
1.2 DRCS Network Topology

The DRCS is essentially a low-traffic density wireless local loop system, providing radio based
customer access network connections between a population of customer units and a parent
telephone exchange (TDM Concentrator).
1'/1H
7'/7V
Outstations
1'/1V
4/4'H'
1'/1V Hub Station
7'/7V
Repeater Station
Outstations Parent Hub Station Hub Station
Outstations
Fig. 8.1 An arbitrary example of a small DRCS network.

A DRCS hub station utilises an omnidirectional antenna to communicate with a population of
outstations (ie. customer terminals) and where necessary to the next hub/repeater station. A
hub/repeater station receives the downward (ie. originating from the parent exchange) transmission
and, following baseband regeneration, re-transmits this signal on another frequency through an
omnidirectional antenna to customers and to any subsequent hub/repeater stations. Hub stations
may be daisy-chained in this manner enabling a service area of hundreds of kilometres to be
covered from the single parent switching centre. Customer stations are fitted with directional
1
500 MHz coordination arrangements are different and are detailed in "Radiocommunication Advisory Guidelines
(Coordinating the operation of transmitters in the 500 MHz bands)"
2
Note: The operation of DRCS and other 1.5 GHz radiocommunication services is subject to the provisions of the “1.5
GHz Band Plan”, December 1996.
FX 3 Appendix 8 - Coordination of DRCS Outstations with Point-to-Point Links December 1998

3
antennas, typically grid reflector or grid parabolic types depending upon the required system gain.
The downward transmissions follow a continuous (TDM) RF carrier format, but the outstations (ie.
upward transmissions to the parent exchange) operate in burst mode (TDMA). Further discussion
regarding the general characteristics of radio concentrator systems is given in ITU-R
Recommendation F.756 "TDMA Point-to-Multipoint Systems Used as Radio Concentrators".
1.3 DRCS Cell Plan and Intra-system Coordination

DRCS networks are designed to facilitate frequency re-use based on a cellular frequency plan.
Accordingly, protection from intrasystem interference is principally afforded through geographic
separation inherent to the DRCS cell plan, where each hub station is allocated a channel which
results in acceptable co-channel and adjacent channel interference from other DRCS sites.
1.4 Interference Potential to/from Point-to-Point links

DRCS backbone repeaters and hub stations comprise a fixed network and may be coordinated using
the information recorded in the ACA's RADCOM assignment database and regular (eg. RALI FX-3
Part 4) coordination methodologies. However, DRCS customer station numbers and locations are
dynamic and (of necessity) must be managed on an operational basis. Consequently, DRCS
outstations operating in rural and remote areas are not individually coordinated and records are not
normally maintained in the ACA assignment database for such outstations.
The uncoordinated customer outstations around the DRCS parent and repeater hub stations
represent a potential interference risk with respect to frequency sharing with regular point-to-point
links. Since DRCS networks are normally confined to rural and remote areas where demand for
point-to-point links is relatively modest, that risk is considered small and frequency coordination
with non-DRCS point-to-point links does not normally represent a significant problem.
Nevertheless, situations may arise where potential interference to/from outstations needs to be taken
into account. The following sections define a coordination model and procedures for the
assessment of interference between DRCS customer outstations and point-to-point fixed services.
1.5 Methodology
In cases where 1.5 GHz point-to-point links need to be coordinated with DRCS point-to-multipoint
service outstations, for which detailed coordination data (ie. geographic coordinates & antenna
type/azimuth) is unavailable, the following coordination model & methodology may be used. For
outstation frequency coordination purposes:
• a minimum coordination radius of 200 km is defined for each corresponding hub station;
• a notional customer outstation, representative of all of the customer outstations within the service
area of a particular hubstation, is assumed to be collocated with the hubstation.
• a notional hubstation to outstation path length of 35 km may be assumed; and
• unless otherwise determined, boresight azimuth may be assumed for the outstation antenna in
relation to potential interference path(s). Outstation antenna RPE and detailed equipment
parameters are provided in Annex A to this document.
In all other respects the methodology is consistent with the basic method of coordination (ref. Part 4
of RALI FX-3) and the application of the co / adjacent channel protection ratios given in the
(Attachment 1) assignment instructions. Accordingly, an outstation interference assessment that

4
satisfies coordination at the hubstation location is deemed to satisfy the coordination requirements
of the population of outstations serviced by that hubstation.
1.5.1 Interference from a point-to-point link transmitter to a DRCS outstation receiver

1. Determine the receive frequencies of co / adjacent channel DRCS outstations, noting that
outstation receive frequencies correspond to the associated hubstation transmit frequencies (ie.
all hubstation are coordinated and their details recorded in the ACA assignment database);
2. Search within 200 km of the proposed point-to-point link transmitter for the locations of any
DRCS hubstations 3 operating on the frequencies determined in Step 1;
3. Applying the basic method of coordination described in Part 4 of RALI FX-3 and the outstation
model criteria defined in this Appendix, determine whether the interference from the proposed
point-to-point link(s) to the notional outstation located at the hubstation location is acceptable;
1.5.2 Interference from a DRCS outstation transmitter to a point-to-point link receiver

1. Determine the transmitting frequencies of any co / adjacent channel DRCS outstations, noting
that outstation transmit frequencies correspond to hubstation receive frequencies;
2. Search within 200 km of the proposed point-to-point system receiver for the locations of any
DRCS hubstations3 receiving on frequencies determined in Step 1;
3. Applying the basic method of frequency coordination and the outstation model criteria described
in this Appendix, determine whether the interference from the notional outstation transmitter
located at the hubstation location is acceptable at the proposed point-to-point link receiver
location.
1.6 Detailed Coordination

Situations may arise where the above procedure may not yield a sufficient degree of confidence. In
such cases additional information concerning particular outstation locations/criteria may be sought
from the DRCS system licensee.
3
Hubstations may be identified in the ACA assignment database using the antenna type field - hubstation
omnidirectional antennas are designated "U", with repeater network sections using parabolic ("MP") antennas.

ANNEX A TO APPENDIX 8: 1.5 GHz DRCS Outstation Characteristics
This annex to Appendix 8 of the RALI FX-3 provides information intended for use in DRCS
(customer) outstation coordination with 1.5 GHz point-to-point links. In cases where specific
outstation equipment characteristics and antenna characteristics are not available, the following
equipment and antenna parameters are to be used.
Modulation 4 QAM
Capacity 2 Mb/s
Channel spacing 2 MHz
Feeder loss 2 dB
Max Tx output power +30 dBm
Receiver IF bandwidth 1.5 MHz
Receiver noise figure 3.5 dB
Rx input level for BER=10-3 -93 dBm
Antenna type 0.8 m grid
Antenna half power beamwidth 13 degrees
On-axis gain 20.3 dBi
Table 1. 1.5 GHz DRCS outstation equipment characteristics
Figure 1. DRCS outstation 1 antenna RPE
1
NOTE: Individual outstations may and often do employ antennas different to that described in this Annex.
However, where specific antenna data is unavailable, the RPE described in this Annex should be used.
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 8 - 1.5 GHz DRCS outstation characteristics December 1998
APPENDIX 9 : Adaptive Transmit Power Control
1 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................... 2
2 ATPC POWER LEVEL DEFINITIONS................................................................................. 3
3 CONSTRAINTS ON THE USE OF ATPC ............................................................................. 4
4 COORDINATION AND LICENSING OF LINKS USING ATPC ...................................... 6

4.1 NO COORDINATION ADVANTAGE CLAIMED .............................................................................. 6
4.2 COORDINATION ADVANTAGE CLAIMED .................................................................................... 6
5 ATPC AND INTERSERVICE COORDINATION ................................................................ 7
Annex:
A. “ATPC Example Calculations”.

2
1 Introduction
Adaptive Transmit Power Control (ATPC) is a feedback control system 1 which temporarily
increases transmitter output power during periods of fading, thus eliminating or at least reducing the
adverse effects of fade events on digital point-to-point microwave fixed services. ATPC offers
immediate and long term advantages to the link operator including reduced average power
consumption, extended equipment MTBF and lower long term RF interference levels.
Under the arrangements detailed in this document 2 and subject to certain limitations, systems fitted
with ATPC may also provide a coordination advantage over systems without this facility.
Propagation statistics indicate that fade events on physically different propagation paths are non-
correlated, thus the probability of simultaneous sensitivity to interference for two separate systems
is small, at least for situations where multipath fading is the dominant limiting factor. As long as
link paths are properly designed with adequate path clearance and are not significantly affected by
rain fade events, the ATPC maximum transmit power boost is required only for appropriately short
periods of time (with annual limits as detailed in Figure 1) and:
• a transmit power less than the maximum power may be used for the calculation of interference
into other systems; and
• the calculation of interference into the receiver of a system using ATPC may assume that the
wanted signal transmitter is operating at maximum transmit power.
Transmit Power in Excess of Coordinated Power
1
% time (annual)
0.1
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Power (dB)
Fig. 1: Permitted Time Above Coordinated Transmit Power for ATPC Systems
1
A feature fitted to an increasing proportion of digital fixed service equipment. For basic principles and application,
refer to chapters 4.3.4 and 5.3.5.2 of ITU-R "Digital Radio Relay Systems" Handbook, Geneva 1996.
2
Consistent with (US) Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) Telecommunications Systems Bulletin TSB10-
F, June 1994.
FX 3 Appendix 9 “Adaptive Transmit Power Control” October 1999

3
Consequently, the use of ATPC can facilitate tighter intra-service frequency coordination, an
important consideration in congested areas. The following sections detail regulatory criteria and
limitations on the use of ATPC by microwave fixed services.
2 ATPC Power Level Definitions

Table 1 defines criteria for the coordination of microwave fixed services using ATPC.
Level Definition Limits

Ptmax The maximum transmit power that will not be ≤ +43 dBm (1 GHz < 10 GHz)
exceeded at any time, used for fade margin and ≤ +40dBm (> 10 GHz)
path reliability (outage) computations; and for See Part 3.2.2 of the RALI FX 3.
calculating the C/I into an ATPC receiver.
Ptcoord The coordinated transmit power selected by the Between 0 to 10 dB below Ptmax;
ATPC system licensee as the power to be used in
calculating interference into a victim receiver.
Ptnom The nominal transmit power level at or below the ≤ Ptcoord.
coordinated power at which the system will
operate in normal (unfaded) conditions.
Prnorm Normal (unfaded) ATPC link receive level. As designed with adequate link availability.
Prtrig The receive level at which ATPC is activated - ie. At least 10 dB below Prnorm
ATPC Trigger Level.
Table 1. ATPC Power Level Definitions and Limits.

4
3 Constraints on the use of ATPC

ATPC is a desirable equipment feature and in general there is no restriction on the deployment of
systems fitted with ATPC. However, system planners and frequency assigners must note that an
ATPC coordination advantage can only be claimed against other microwave fixed services if all of
the following criteria are satisfied:
1. the system being coordinated is a compliant ATPC system operating in a band below 12.2 GHz.
(Systems operating above 12.2 GHz may still make use of ATPC, but no coordination advantage
may be claimed and for coordination purposes, Ptcoord = Ptmax) 3; and
2. the ATPC system operational parameters must be consistent with the criteria and limits defined
in Table 1 (see paragraph 1.2); and
3. full path clearance (0.6 of the first fresnel zone for the worst month) exists over the ATPC
system transmission path. (Systems operating over propagation paths that do not meet this
criteria can still make use of ATPC, but no coordination advantage may be claimed and for
coordination purposes Ptcoord = Ptmax ); and
4. propagation reliability calculations, based on ITU-R Recommendation P.530 (see 4.1 of
Appendix 4 to RALI FX 3), demonstrate that the expected annual time percentages for path
fading do not exceed the limits specified in Table 2; and
5. ATPC power increases are triggered on the basis of propagation (ie. path fading). Interference or
error correcting information alone is not sufficient justification for increasing transmit power, but
either or both may be used as an additional criterion; and
6. the ATPC system must not remain at Ptmax for more than five consecutive minutes at a time.
Any event which exceeds this criterion must be treated as an alarm condition which
automatically returns the transmit power back to Ptcoord . ATPC should not be reenabled until the
reason for the problem has been established and corrected; and
7. if an ATPC system is fitted with space diversity, the ATPC control signal must be derived from
the strongest signal of the diversity system where baseband switching is used. For systems
employing IF (Intermediate Frequency) combiners, the ATPC control signal is derived from the
combined signal of the diversity system. In calculating percentages of time above Ptcoord , the
space diversity improvement factor may be found to be less than unity if the fade depth is small.
In this case, the space diversity improvement factor must be assumed as unity (no improvement
or penalty).
If all of the above constraints are satisfied, then an effective coordination advantage (equal to
Ptmax - Ptcoord ) of up to a maximum of 10 dB may be claimed in coordination against other terrestrial
microwave fixed services - ie. interference calculations from an ATPC system may assume the
lower coordinated Ptcoord transmit power level. Conversely, interference and fade margin
calculations into the receiver of an ATPC equipped system can then assume that the maximum Ptmax
transmit power level is in use over the wanted signal path.
Note: An ATPC coordination advantage can only be claimed for intra-service coordination against
other microwave fixed services (refer to Section 5 of this document).
3
The impact of rain rates and duration on interference events is subject to further studies.

5
Power above Permitted time (annual)

Ptcoord (dB) % seconds/ year
(≤) 0.0 100 31536000
(>) 0.0 0.50 157500
1 0.33 103950
2 0.22 69300
3 0.15 47250
4 0.10 31500
5 0.07 22050
6 0.047 14805
7 0.032 10080
8 0.021 6615
9 0.014 4410
10 0.010 3150
Table 2. Time Permitted Above the Coordinated Transmit Power in an ATPC Link
Table 2 shows the permitted time percentages and annual power boost times for ramp type ATPC
systems. For step type systems, only single values (eg. +6dB, +10 dB) need be considered.

6
4 Coordination and Licensing of Links Using ATPC

An applicant must clearly indicate on their licence application that ATPC is to be used and the type
of ATPC (ramp or step) described. The coordination and licensing procedure must take account of
whether or not a coordination advantage is being claimed for ATPC.
4.1 No Coordination Advantage Claimed

If no coordination advantage is claimed for an ATPC system, the Coordinated Transmit Power
(Ptcoord) is deemed to equal the ATPC Maximum Transmit Power (Ptmax) and no special account
needs to be taken in the coordination and licensing context.
4.2 Coordination Advantage Claimed

Where a coordination advantage is claimed for a proposed new link, the frequency assigner must be
satisfied that compliance is demonstrated against all of the criteria specified in sections 2 and 3 of
this document. Where an assigner is unable to verify compliance with all relevant criteria, no
coordination advantage can be allowed unless the system licensee or their authorised agent
furnishes a written statement certifying compliance.
The spectrum access record 4 of a system for which a coordination advantage is approved should
clearly indicate that ATPC is being used and must be endorsed with:
1. Special Condition FB which states, 'The licensed transmitter power may be exceeded for short
periods of time but must not exceed the limits specified in Appendix 9 of the RALI FX 3
'Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination'." and
2. Advisory Note FC which states, ”This microwave fixed service uses Adaptive Transmit Power
Control (ATPC) in accordance with the provisions of Appendix 9 of the RALI FX 3 'Microwave
Fixed Services Frequency Coordination'. “
The coordination procedure for an ATPC system is the same as for systems without ATPC and
consistent with Part 4 of the RALI FX 3. However, for the purposes of calculating:
• the wanted signal receive levels (Part 4.2.2 of RALI FX 3) into an ATPC system, Pt (the wanted
signal transmit power) is deemed to equal the maximum available ATPC power (Ptmax); and
• the interference levels from an ATPC transmitter undergoing coordination against other systems,
the ATPC transmit power is deemed to equal the coordinated transmit power (Ptcoord).
An essential requirement, consistent with section 3(4) of this document, is that propagation
reliability calculations for the ATPC system must demonstrate that the expected annual time
percentages for the wanted signal path fading do not exceed the limits specified in Table 2. Time
percentages can be calculated using the relevant reliability prediction algorithms provided in ITU-R
Recommendation P.530 (see section 4.1 of Appendix 4 of RALI FX 3). Reliability calculations are
performed using the fade margin found as the difference between the receive signal level under the
maximum available ATPC power (Ptmax), and the receiver threshold.
• For an ATPC system which steps (switches) to a single higher transmit power level, only a single
calculation of the time that the fade depth to the ATPC Trigger Level (Prtrig) is exceeded is
necessary.
4
The current ACA licensing database does not support a specific ATPC identifier field.

7
• For a continuous (ramp) type ATPC system, calculations of the time that (Ptcoord) is exceeded and
the time that (Ptmax) is reached are sufficient.
Future ATPC implementations that rely on different algorithms may require time percentage
calculations for the entire range of transmit powers in excess of (Ptcoord). Example calculations of
ATPC time above Coordinated Transmit Power are provided in Annex A to this document.
5 ATPC and Interservice Coordination

Interference events and their duration to/ from other (especially non-terrestrial) services may not be
de-correlated in the same manner as the homogenous fixed service 5. Accordingly, an ATPC
coordination advantage cannot be claimed when calculating interference levels to/ from ATPC links
against other (non fixed) radiocommunication services.
For the purposes of interservice coordination and the calculation of:
• the wanted signal receive levels (Part 4.2.2 of RALI FX 3) in an ATPC system, Pt (the wanted
signal transmit power) is deemed to equal the Coordinated Transmit Power (Ptcoord); and
• the interference levels from an ATPC transmitter undergoing coordination against other (non-
fixed) radiocommunication services, the ATPC system transmit power is deemed to equal the
Maximum Transmit Power (Ptmax).
Note: In the absence of internationally accepted standards for ATPC, the arrangements detailed in
this document are based on and generally consistent with Section 4.3 of (US) Telecommunications
Industry Association (TIA) Telecommunications Systems Bulletin TSB10-F, June 1994. The ACA
may consider other recognised standards in the future and detailed proposals may be forwarded to
the Manager, Spectrum Planning Team, ACA, for consideration.
5
Refer to ITU-R Recommendation F.758 "Considerations in the Development of Criteria for Sharing Between the
Terrestrial Fixed Service and Other Services".

ANNEX A TO APPENDIX 9: ATPC EXAMPLE CALCULATIONS
This document provides example calculations for the determination of Adaptive Transmit
Power Control (ATPC) operating parameters in cases where an ATPC coordination
advantage is to be claimed (see Section 4.2 of Appendix 9 “Adaptive Transmit Power
Control” of the RALI FX 3).
Examples of determining the operating parameters, i.e., Receive Signal Level (RSL),
Transmit Power versus Net Path Loss (NPL), Coordinated Transmit Power (Pcoord) and
fraction of time spent at a given transmit power are given, with and without space
diversity. Operating parameters and calculations given in the examples are based on:
• an arbitrary 6.7 GHz long-haul high capacity system. However, through appropriate
substitution, calculations can be performed for other system types;
• an assumed design NPL of 65 dB;
• a four segment ATPC transfer function (see Fig.1). Other ATPC transfer functions
can be adapted by redefining the step boundaries;
• an ATPC algorithm driven by RSL, evaluated in a narrow spectrum around the carrier
frequency;
• fade depth probability calculations given in ITU-R Recommendation P.530-7, §2.3
"Fading and enhancement due to multipath and related mechanisms"; and
• space diversity improvement factor taken from ITU-R Recommendation P.530-7,
§6.2.1 "Diversity techniques in analogue systems", since this method is appropriate
for cases where signal is confined to a relatively narrow spectrum.
ATPC (example) Transfer Function
Pt min , NPL < BP1

Pt min + s1 ( NPL − BP1 ) , BP1 ≤ NPL < BP2
Pt =
Pt min + s1 (BP2 − BP1 ) + s 2 ( NPL − BP2 ) , BP2 ≤ NPL < BP3
Pt max , NPL ≥ BP3
Where:
Ptmin = +17 dBm { minimum transmit power }

Ptmax = +37 dBm { maximum transmit power }
BP1 = 45 dB { 1st transfer function break point }
BP2 = 84 dB { 2nd transfer function break point }
BP3 = 94 dB { 3rd transfer function break point }
s1 =¼ { transfer function proportionality constant }
s2 =1 { second proportionality constant }
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 9 “ATPC Example Calculations” October 1999

2
ATPC Transfer Function

40
35
TX power (dBm)
30
25
20
15
40 50 60 70 80 90 100
NPL (dB)
Figure 1 ATPC example (RSL vs Transmit Power) transfer function
Calculation Procedure
A step-by-step procedure for manual calculations is given below. Using a spreadsheet,
and built-in optimization or iterative functions, the entire process can be automated.
The parameters and derivations used in the following examples are defined in ITU-R
Recommendation P.530-7; Table 1 lists the values assigned to these parameters in the
following examples.
1 - Determine the geoclimatic factor K (§2.3.1.1).
2 - Calculate the path inclination |εp| §2.3.1.2.
3 - Calculate the percentage of time pw that fade depth of 35 dB is exceeded in the

average worst month (§2.3.1.3).
4 - Determine the value of qa (§2.3.2) using equations (21), (22), and (24).
5 - Find the fade depth Ac, with the probability pw = 0.5 from (1).
20  p 
Ac = − ⋅ log − ln1 − w  (1)
qa   100 

3
Here, Ac, in dB, is the path loss in addition to the nominal NPL due to fading, that would
be experienced for 0.5 % of the time. Net Path Loss now becomes NPLc, calculated from
(2).
NPLc = NPL + Ac (2)
6 - From the ATPC transfer function, (3), calculate the Transmit Power level Pt,
corresponding to NPLc.
Pmin , NPL < BP1
Pmin + s1 ( NPL − BP1 ) , BP1 ≤ NPL < BP2
Pt = (3)
Pmin + s1 (BP2 − BP1 ) + s 2 ( NPL − BP2 ) , BP2 ≤ NPL < BP3
Pmax , NPL ≥ BP3
This would be initial value for the Coordinated Power, Pc.
7 - Find the depth of fade, ∆F corresponding to the Maximum Transmit Power Pmax, at
BP3. This value will be used to verify that the percentage of time permitted above the
Coordinated Transmit Power level is met.
∆F = BP3 − NPL (4)
8 - Calculate the probability p∆F of a fade at the depth of ∆F dB from (5).

[ (
p ∆F = 100 ⋅ 1 − exp − 10 − qa ⋅∆F / 20 )] (5)
9 - Determine the difference ∆P, between the Maximum Power Pmax, and the Coordinated
Power Pc.
∆P = Pmax − Pc (6)
10 - Check from Appendix 9 (Table 2, Part 3) to see if the percentage of time permitted at
∆P dB above Coordinated Power is equal or greater than p∆F. If this requirement is not
met, increase Pc by a suitable increment, (e.g., 0.5 dB), and repeat step 9 until the
requirement is met.
11 - Using the final values obtained for the Coordinated Power Pc, and ∆F, the level of
the Maximum Transmit Power Pmax above Coordinated Power, recalculate the percentage
of time these values would be experienced by applying (7).
[ (
p X = 100 ⋅ 1 − exp − 10 − qa ⋅ X / 20 )] (7)

4
Note: Intermediate values can be found by logarithmic interpolation between the

steps of Appendix 9, Table 2 (ie. per Figure 1 “Permitted time above
Coordinated Power for ATPC systems”).
parameter definition value notes

C0 coefficient in definition of K 4.2 value selected applicable to Australia
ξ latitude <40 value selected applicable to Australia
CLat coefficient in definition of K 0 value selected applicable to Australia
CLon coefficient in definition of K 0 value selected applicable to Australia
pL climatic variable 25 worst case applicable to Australia
εp path inclination 1 assumed worst case
d path length 25 / without / with, space diversity
50
f frequency 6.7
S vertical separation of 10 typical
antennas
V gain difference between 1 Typical
antennas
Table 1: Geoclimatic and path parameters for example cases.

5
Examples
A. Without Space Diversity

Figure 2 shows the characteristics of a high capacity digital ATPC system without space
diversity. Calculation results of from each step are given below.
1 - K = 2.38⋅10-5. 6 - Pc = 30.5 dBm.

2 - Worst case assumed as |εp| = 1. 7 - ∆F = 29 dB
3 - pw = 2.44⋅10-3%. 8 - p∆F = 0.1069%
4 - qa = 2.05. 9 - ∆P = 6.5 dB
5 - Ac = 22.5 dB
NPLc = 65+22.5 = 87.5 dB.
10 - The time allowed at 6.5 dB above the Coordinated Power is 0.0376%, showing that
the requirement is not met. By incrementing Pc in 0.5 dB steps, it is found that at
Pc = 33.5 dBm, ∆P value obtained in step 9 becomes 3.5 dB with the time allowed being
0.1242% from the table. Since this is greater than p∆F = 0.1069%, in step 8, the
requirement has been met.
11 - Thus a Transmit Power level of 33.5 dB can be used for interference calculations.
Note: With an increment of 0.1 dB, it is found that a Coordinated Power level of
33.1 dBm would satisfy the requirements. See Figure 3.
B. With Space Diversity
Figure 4 shows the characteristics of a high capacity digital ATPC system with space
diversity. Calculations results from each step are given below.
1 - K = 2.38⋅10-5. 6 - Pc = 25.7 dBm.

2 - Worst case assumed as |εp| = 1. 7 - ∆F =29 dB
3 - pw = 2.96⋅10-2%. 8 - p∆F = 0.0042%
4 - qa = 1.43. 9 - ∆P = 11.3 dB
5 - Ac = 13.9 dB
NPLc = 65+13.9 = 78.9 dB.
10 - The time at 11.3 dB above the Coordinated Power is 0.0042% (see Figure 5).
However, (in accordance with Table 2 of Appendix 9) ∆P may not exceed 10 dB.
11 - Thus it is necessary to either recalculate for a Pc with ∆P ≤ 10 dB or for a Pmax that

meets the criteria. Further calculations show that a Pc of +25.7 dBm can still be used for
interference calculations, provided that Pmax is limited to +35.7 dBm.

6
ATPC Characteristics, Without Space Diversity

Hop Length : 25.0 km | Frequency : 6.7 GHz
RSL (dBm) Tx Power
(dBm)
-20 40 System gain : 100.2 dB @ BER 1.0E-3
-23.0
-23.0 NPL : 65 dB
-25 Climatic variable pL : 25
37.0
-27.0
TX MAX : 37 dBm | TX MIN : 17 dBm
-30 35
Nominal : (22.3 dBm, 14.8 dB below Max)
33.1
-35
Coordinated : (33.1 dBm, 3.9 dB below Max)

-40 30 Fade depth to coordinated : 25.1 dB
-42.8 Time at coordinated allowed : 0.500 %

-45 Time at coordinated actual : 0.267 %
27.0
Time at maximum power, allowed : 0.1069 %
-50 25 Time at maximum power, actual : 0.1069 %
-55 RSL
22.3
-57.0 -57.0 Upper limit for BER 10E-3
Lower limit for BER 10E-3
-60 20
-63.2 TX Power
-65
17.0
(RSL and Tx Power not to same scale)
-68.0
-70 15 Time above coordinated power allowance : TIA/EIA TSB 10-F
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 Probability of fade calculations : ITU-R P.530-7
NPL (dB)
Figure 2: ATPC Characteristics, without Space Diversity for 25 km hop

7
Figure 3: ATPC Characteristics, without Space Diversity

8
ATPC Characteristics, with Space Diversity

Hop Length : 50.0 km | Frequency : 6.7 GHz
RSL (dBm) Tx Power
(dBm) Div spacing : 10.0 m | Level diff : 1.0 dB
-20 40 System gain : 100.2 dB @ BER 1.0E-3
-23.0
-23.0 NPL : 65 dB
-25 Climatic variable pL : 25
37.0
-27.0
TX MAX : 37 dBm | TX MIN : 17 dBm
-30 35
Nominal : (22.3 dBm, 14.8 dB below Max)
-35
Coordinated : (25.7 dBm, 11.3 dB below Max)

-40 30 Fade depth to coordinated : 13.9 dB
-42.8 Time at coordinated allowed : 0.500 %

-45 Time at coordinated actual : 0.500 %
27.0
Time at maximum power, allowed : 0.0059 %
-50 25.7 25 Time at maximum power, actual : 0.0042 %
-55 RSL
22.3
-57.0 -57.0 Upper limit for BER 10E-3
-60 20
-63.2 TX Power
-65
17.0
(RSL and Tx Power not to same scale)
-68.0
-70 15 Time above coordinated power allowance : TIA/EIA TSB 10-F
40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 Probability of fade calculations : ITU-R P.530-7
NPL (dB)
Figure 4: ATPC Characteristics, Space Diversity

9
Figure 5: ATPC Characteristics, Space Diversity

APPENDIX 10: Notional Antennas
Introduction
After 31 March 2005 the use of notional antennas for new assignments will not be
accepted. For antenna compliance requirements for point-to-point microwave fixed
services after 31 March 2005 refer to Appendix 11.
Note: During a phase-in period between 31 March 2004 and 31 March 2005, the requirements of
either Appendix 10 or Appendix 11 can be used to determine antenna compliance.
Use of Notional Antennas in coordination studies

The use of notional antennas in coordination studies will not be accepted for new
assignments after 31 March 2005. Notional antenna radiation pattern envelopes may
only be used in coordination studies for fixed services licensed prior to 31 March
2005 for which no actual antenna radiation pattern envelope is available.
Antennas authorised before 31 March 2005
Antennas associated with assignments that have been co-ordinated and licensed
before 31 March 2005 under the Appendix 10 requirements will not be required to be
re-evaluated for compliance with Appendix 11 1.
Background
The notional antenna specifies the radiation characteristics of the minimum
performance antenna that may be used in a given point-to-point microwave fixed
service frequency band. Licensees are required to employ antennas with equivalent or
better performance than the specified notional, with particular emphasis on HSDA. In
some instances, in order to achieve coordination in a difficult area, that ACA may
require that antennas with performance exceeding that of the notional antenna be used
in order to facilitate coordination and maximise spectrum utilisation.
Minimum Performance Specifications

The minimum performance antennas defined in Annex A for each microwave fixed
service band are based on rotationally symmetric parabolic dishes and include
specifications for notional:
• Gain - on axis power gain as a ratio, referred to an isotropic antenna (dBi);

• Half Power Beamwidth - beamwidth (in degrees of arc), representing the fixed
(3dB) points of the notional RPE; and
• RPE - the radiation envelope of the notional antenna as a ratio (in dB) in relation to
the antenna beam (on axis) response.
1
Antennas authorised under the Appendix 10 requirements but which are not compliant under the
Appendix 11 regime can continue to be used at their authorised location and in their authorised
configuration but will not be allowed to be redeployed after 31 March 2005.
FX 3 Appendix 10 – Notional Antennas April 2004

Development of Notional Antennas
The notional performance specifications detailed in Annex A were developed 2 with a
view to optimising system costs against spectrum productivity considerations and
represent the consolidation of envelope patterns of actual manufactured antennas for
each microwave fixed service band, based on:
• grid parabolic antennas for the bands below 3 GHz;

• high performance (HP) solid parabolic antennas in the 3.8/6.7/11/18 GHz bands
supporting homogeneous high capacity telecommunication services; and
• standard solid parabolic dishes for the remaining bands.
Although the gain, beamwidth and RPE characteristics of all parabolic antennas are
proportional to the antenna effective aperture (ie. proportional to physical size), the
Annex A specified size (diameter) parameter should not be construed as a part of the
minimum performance specification. This parameter simply refers to the diameter of
the basis (grid/standard/HP) antenna used to derive a particular notional specification
and in some cases an antenna of smaller diameter (or different type) to the notional
may meet or substantively exceed the specified minimum performance criteria.
Compliance Issues
A problem of interpretation could arise in situations where a particular antenna might
not quite meet the notional specification in all respects but clearly demonstrates
equivalent or superior performance over the principal range of azimuths. This is
sometimes evident in comparisons of the RPE of a notional antenna based on a
standard antenna against an actual (typically high performance) antenna of slightly
smaller diameter than the notional. Enquiries concerning minimum antenna
performance and other notional antenna related matters should be referred to the
Manager, Spectrum Planning and Engineering Team, Radiofrequency Planning Group
for policy advice.
Note: The minimum performance (notional) antenna requirement will not normally be
relaxed within designated HSDA locations. In the event of interference, a victim
system antenna will be expected to at least meet the notional antenna performance
criteria.
2
Spectrum Planning Report 5/90 “Notional Antenna Radiation Patterns”, Department of Transport and
Communications, July 1990.
FX 3 Appendix 10 – Notional Antennas April 2004

ANNEX A TO APPENDIX 10: Notional Antenna Radiation Pattern Envelopes
This annex consolidates the notional antenna radiation pattern envelopes for fixed
microwave point-to-point bands.
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 10 “Notional Antenna Radiation Pattern Envelopes” April 2004

2
NOTIONAL ANTENNA RADIATION PATTERN ENVELOPE
Diameter 1.8 m (grid parabolic dish)

Notional Half Power Beam Width 8 degrees
Notional On-axis Gain 26 dBi
10
CO- POLARISATION
20
Antenna
Directivity 30
dB down
from
Main 40
Lobe CROSS- POLARISATION
50
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth
Degrees from Main Lobe
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 10 “Notional Antenna Radiation Pattern Envelopes” August 1998

3
THE 1.8 GHz BAND (1700 - 1900 MHz)

Notional Half Power Beam Width 6 degrees
Notional On-Axis Gain 28 dBi
10
CO- POLARISATION
20
Antenna
Directivity 30
dB down
from
Main 40
Lobe CROSS- POLARISATION
50
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 10 “Notional Antenna Radiation Pattern Envelopes” May 1999

4
THE 2.1 GHz BAND (1900 - 2300 MHz)

Notional Half Power Beam Width 3.3 degrees
10
20
Antenna
Directivity 30 CO- POLARISATION
dB down
from
Main 40
Lobe
CROSS- POLARISATION
50
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth

5
THE 2.2 GHz BAND (2025 - 2285 MHz)

10
20
Antenna
dB down
from
Main 40
Lobe
CROSS- POLARISATION
50
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 10 “Notional Antenna Radiation Pattern Envelopes” September 2001

6
THE 3.8 GHz BAND (3580 - 4200 MHz)
Diameter 3.0 m (high performance parabolic dish)

10
20
Antenna
Directivity 30
dB down
from CO- POLARISATION
Main 40
Lobe
50
60
CROSS- POLARISATION
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth
.
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 10 “Notional Antenna Radiation Pattern Envelopes” October 1998

7
Diameter 3.0 m (standard parabolic dish)

10
20
Antenna
Directivity
30
dB down CO- POLARISATION
from
Main 40
Lobe
50
CROSS- POLARISATION
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth

8
THE 6.7 GHz BAND (6425 - 7110 MHz)

10
20
Antenna 30
Directivity
dB down
from 40
Main CO- POLARISATION
Lobe
50
60
CROSS- POLARISATION
70
80
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth

9
THE 7.5 GHz BAND (7425 - 7725 MHz)

10
20
Antenna
Directivity
dB down 30
CO- POLARISATION
from
Main
Lobe 40
50
CROSS- POLARISATION
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth

10

Notional Gain 43 dBi
10
20
Antenna
Directivity 30
dB down
from CO- POLARISATION
Main 40
Lobe
50
60
CROSS- POLARISATION
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth

11
THE 10 GHz BAND (10.55 - 10.68 GHz)

Notional Gain 33 dBi
10
20
Antenna CO- POLARISATION

Directivity 30
dB down
from
Main 40
Lobe
50
CROSS- POLARISATION
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth

12
11 GHz BAND (10.7 - 11.7 GHz)

Notional Half Power Beam Width 1 degree
10
20
Antenna
Directivity 30
dB down
40
from
Main 50
Lobe CO- POLARISATION
60
70
CROSS- POLARISATION
80
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

13
THE 13 GHz BAND (12.75 - 13.25 GHz)

10
20
Antenna
Directivity 30
CO- POLARISATION
dB down
from
Main 40
Lobe
50
CROSS- POLARISATION
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth

14
THE 15 GHz BAND (14.5 - 15.35 GHz)

10
20
Antenna
dB down
from
Main 40
Lobe
50
CROSS- POLARISATION
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth

15
THE 18 GHz BAND (17.7 - 19.7 GHz)

Notional Half Power Beam Width 3.6 Degrees
Notional On-Axis Gain 33.5 dBi
10
20
dB DOWN FROM MAIN LOBE
CO-POLARISATION
ANTENNA DIRECTIVITY
30
40
50
CROSS-POLARISATION
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 14 0 160 1 80
AZIMUTH
DEGREES FROM MAIN LOBE

16
THE 22 GHz BAND (21.2 - 23.6 GHz)

Notional Half Power Beam Width 3 Degrees
10
20
Antenna CO- POLARISATION

Directivity 30
dB down
from
Main 40
Lobe
50 CROSS- POLARISATION
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth

17

Notional On-axis Gain 39.5 dBi
10
20
dB DOWN FROM MAIN LOBE
ANTENNA DIRECTIVITY
30
40
50
60
Co-polar
Cross-polar
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
AZIMUTH
DEGREES FROM MAIN LOBE
FX 3 Annex A to Appendix 10 “Notional Antenna Radiation Pattern Envelopes” January 2002

18
THE 50 GHz BAND (50.4 - 51.15 GHz)

10
20
Antenna
Directivity 30
CO- POLARISATION
dB down
from
Main 40
Lobe
50
CROSS- POLARISATION
60
70
0 5 10 15 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180
Azimuth

APPENDIX 11: Antenna Compliance Requirements
Table of Contents
1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1
2. Minimum Antenna Performance Requirements .................................................................... 1
3. Coordination Requirements ..................................................................................................... 2
4. Provision of RPE data.............................................................................................................. 3
5. Trunk Bands ............................................................................................................................. 3
6. Prime Sites ................................................................................................................................ 3
7. Links Crossing HSDA boundaries .......................................................................................... 3
8. Antenna Measurement Standards ........................................................................................... 4
9. Exemptions ............................................................................................................................... 4
1. Introduction
This appendix details the compliance requirements for antennas used in the point-to-point
microwave fixed service frequency bands.
Antenna compliance is determined by reference to the antenna front-to-back (F/B) ratio and
antenna cross-polar discrimination (XPD) as stated by the respective product manufacturer.
These values are then compared to Table 1 which provides the minimum acceptable antenna
performance requirements based on F/B ratios and XPD for each band.
2. Minimum Antenna Performance Requirements

Licensees are required to employ antennas with characteristics that meet or exceed those
specified in Table 1. In some instances, in order to achieve coordination in a difficult area, the
ACA may require that antennas with performance exceeding that specified in Table 1 be used in
order to facilitate coordination and maximise spectrum utilisation.
The minimum requirements specified in Table 1 differ depending on the location of the fixed
service:
• in designated High Spectrum Demand Areas 1 (HSDAs) point-to-point fixed service
antennas must satisfy the minimum XPD performance and must satisfy the a
minimum F/B ratio given in the Grade B column of Table 1; and,
• outside HSDAs point-to-point microwave fixed service antennas must satisfy the
minimum XPD performance and must satisfy the minimum F/B ratio given in the
Grade C column of Table 1.
1
See section 3.3.2 of RALI FX-3
FX 3 Appendix 11 – Antenna Compliance Requirements April 2004

2
Band XPD Grade C Grade B Grade A

(min) F/B>x F/B>x F/B>x
GHz dB dB dB dB
1.5 25 25 30 40
1.8 25 30 35 45
2.1 25 30 40 50
2.2 25 30 40 50
3.8 30 60 60 65
6.0 30 60 60 75
6.7 30 65 65 75
7.5 25 45 55 70
8 30 60 60 75
10 30 45 55 65
11 30 60 60 75
13 25 45 55 70
15 30 45 55 65
18 30 45 55 65
22 30 45 55 65
28 30 45 55 65
38 30 45 55 65
50 30 45 55 65
Table 1: Minimum acceptable antenna performance requirements
Note 1: The three classes of antennas defined are differentiated on the basis of their F/B ratio. Essentially,
standard (STD) antennas are Grade C, high performance (HP) antennas are Grade B and ultra high performance
(UHP) antennas are Grade A. Whilst inclusion of Grade A antennas in this Table is not strictly necessary under
these regulatory arrangements, it allows users to differentiate between HP and UHP antenna types and could
provide a basis for future regulatory discrimination between antenna types. It might also provide a basis for a
future consideration of a revision to the fees schedule to take account of the spectrum efficiency of the antenna.
Note 2: For the purposes of this appendix the front-to-back ratio is defined as the highest peak of the radiation
pattern in the region 1800 +/- 400 (i.e. azimuth from 1400 to 2200) relative to the main beam. Cross-polar
discrimination is defined as the difference between the peak of the co-polarised main beam and the maximum
cross-polarised signal over an angle twice the half power beamwidth of the co-polarised main beam.
3. Coordination Requirements
The ACA requires that frequency coordination studies be performed using manufacturer’s actual
antenna radiation pattern envelope (RPE) data for both proposed and existing assignments 2.
As a consequence actual RPE data for all licensed services will need to be accessible for the life
of these services for coordination purposes. In some cases manufacturer RPE data may not be
available for assignments that were licensed prior to the introduction of these antenna regulatory
compliance arrangements (i.e. prior to 31 March 2005) or assignments were licensed using the
notional antenna. Only in these cases will the use of notional antenna RPEs, provided at
Appendix 10, be allowed in frequency coordination studies.
2
Note that previously, under the Appendix 10 notional antenna regime, whenever RPE data was not available
assigners could have used “a notional antenna radiation pattern envelope”.
FX 3 Appendix 11 – Antenna Compliance Requirements January2008

4. Provision of RPE data
Antenna RPE data for proposed new assignments must be provided to the ACA as a condition of
the proposed assignment being accepted, unless already held by the ACA. To facilitate the
process, the ACA maintains a database of antenna RPE data files and provides a searchable list
on the ACA website. This will enable licensees and assigners to verify if an RPE data file is
already held by the ACA. Licensees only need to provide the ACA with an RPE data file if it is
not on the ACA list.
The ACA will provide the RPE data only when other sources cannot. RPE data is readily
available from most manufacturers and in the first instance users will be expected to contact the
manufacturers to obtain the RPE data.
Note: the ACA expects that licensees submitting RPE data would normally submit it as an
electronic data file in NSMA format, however, other formats may be accepted provided they
provide similar information with regard to antenna pattern breakpoints and can be easily read and
understood.
5. Trunk Bands
A geographic definition of trunk routes and prime sites is problematic due to the constant
development of new sites and new trunk routes. However, as many trunk routes are located in
non-HSDAs allowing the use of standard Grade C antennas would impact on the provision of
trunk services. In order to maintain the spectrum efficiency for trunk services the front-to-back
criteria in the trunk bands (3.8, 6, 6.7 and 8 GHz) for Grade C have been set to be the same as
Grade B. This approach is administratively simple as it avoids a requirement to define trunk
routes (and to update that definition as new trunk routes are developed). Also, specifying Grade B
as a minimum for the trunk bands ensures that the spectrum efficiency in important trunk bands is
not compromised by use of poorer performing antennas in those bands.
6. Prime Sites
A “prime sites” definition is also not necessary. Antennas used at sites within HSDAs are
required to be Grade B or better so the spectrum utility is preserved. As mentioned above, the
spectrum utility of sites that are used as part of a trunk route outside HSDAs will be subject to the
tighter requirements that apply for trunk bands. For non-trunk bands spectrum availability is
usually not critical at sites outside the HSDAs and so it was considered reasonable to set a less
stringent compliance requirement in those cases.
7. Links Crossing HSDA boundaries

Fixed service point-to-point microwave links that simply traverse a HSDA (i.e. both ends of a
link are outside the HSDA but the path partially crosses a HSDA) will not be considered to be
within the HSDA. However, if one end of a link is located inside a HSDA and the other is
outside, then both ends of the link will need to conform to the requirements for antennas within
the HSDA for that band.

4
8. Antenna Measurement Standards

The ACA does not intend mandating measurement standards. However, it would be expected
that the RPE data provided would be in accordance with internationally recognised standards and
methodologies. If it is found that an antenna differs markedly from the published data and is
causing a problem then the ACA may require that the antenna be replaced at the licensee’s
expense.
9. Exemptions
Given the flexibility provided by the new regime, no exemptions will be allowed with respect to
minimum acceptable performance criteria.
The use of parabolic antennas was assumed in deriving the values included in Table 1, other
types, such as ‘patch’ antennas, may be used as long as they conform to the requirement of
having a single main axis of radiation and they meet the other relevant criteria specified for each
band.

RALI FX03 - 20june2023

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RALI FX03 - 20june2023

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

RALI FX03 - 20june2023

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

RALI : FX 3

DATE OF EFFECT : 20/06/2023

Radiocommunications Assignment and Licensing Instruction

MICROWAVE FIXED SERVICES

AUSTRALIAN COMMUNICATIONS AND MEDIA AUTHORITY

Suggestions for improvements to Radiocommunications Assignment and Licensing

The following amendments to RALI FX3 are authorised:

Date of Effect Page Date* Description of Amendment

Main Body: amended to reflect current organisational names,

Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

Preamble: updated embargo references, reinstated 2.2 GHz

1.8 GHz band: added reference "Strategies for WAS" paper,

RALI FX 3 Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination June 2023

2.1 GHz band: added reference "Strategies for WAS" paper,

2.2 GHz band: reverted to April 2004 version, added reference

2.5 GHz band: added reference "Strategies for WAS" paper,

3.8 GHz band: added reference "Strategies for WAS" paper,

5 GHz band: added reference "Strategies for WAS" paper,

Revision of assignment instructions in 2.1 GHz band and

Removal of MDS A band plan and references to MDS A within

Summary table amended to remove MDS A band and to reflect

RALI FX 3 Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination June 2023

the previous channel arrangements that were superseded in

Main text Sections 3.1.4, 3.2.4 and 4.2.2 were updated.

Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

Introductory text updated to reflect change from notional

Notional antenna pattern envelopes removed from all band

Appendix 6 updated to remove case studies referring to notional

Appendix 10 (including Annex A) added detailing notional

Appendix 11 added detailing antenna compliance requirements.

Consequential update to Table of Contents (Appendices) to

Also a number of minor changes and editorials were made

RALI FX 3 Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination June 2023

Appendix 1 – RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

118 13 December 2001 Appendix 1 – RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

December 2001 Change ABC designated channels (channels 4, 7, 15 and 18) to

October 2001 Remove reference to Manager, Radiocommunications Licensing

October 2001 Remove Advisory Notes BN and BL and reference to Embargo

RALI FX 3 Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination June 2023

Other parts have been updated as follows:

28 September 2001 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

June 2001 Change to the 13 GHz Band method of channel designation

June 2001 Annex A updated to accommodate ITU-R Recommendation

June 2001 Table "Microwave fixed services bands - typical utilisation

Table "Index of RF Channel Arrangements" deleted.

RALI FX 3 Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination June 2023

January 2001 Table "Microwave fixed services bands - typical utilisation

May 2000 Correction to Reference 8 title and addition of Advisory Notes

May 2000 Addition of text to reflect spectrum licensing and Embargo 26

January 2000 Appendix 7 amended to take account of additional spectrum

October 1999 Appendix 6 references to MS 28 replaced by reference to the

October 1999 Part 1 references to MS 28 replaced by reference to the

October 1999 References updated to include the information paper "Principles

October 1999 Correction to text in section 2.1 of Appendix 5 (117.5E

October 1999 Appendix 9 'Adaptive Transmit Power Control' and Annex A to

RALI FX 3 Microwave Fixed Services Frequency Coordination June 2023

October 1999 Consequential amendments to the Table of Contents, sections

31 May 1999 Appendix 1 - RF Channel Arrangements and Assignment

May 1999 The 58 GHz Band added.